2013 Charger

2013 charger
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
charger
Chrysler Group LLC
13D481-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optional
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that are
accidents. not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga-
tion upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
your satisfaction.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart-
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 2
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 SENTRY KEY威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .20
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .24 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — 䡵 Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .54
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .55
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .95
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 2
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Supplemental Restraint System
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
(SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .65
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion). the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob. 2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)

1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Ignition Or Accessory On Message
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
and then pull the key out with your other hand. ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect威 system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition 2
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
access to an unlocked vehicle. unattended.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or SENTRY KEY姞
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
in a location accessible to children, and do not
or unlocked.
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
other controls, or move the vehicle. (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
cause serious injury or death. vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
CAUTION!
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compat-
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start problems and loss of security protection.
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds. All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 Replacement Keys
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron- NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
as possible by an authorized dealer. vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer Sys-
CAUTION!
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and authorized dealer.
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- Customer Key Programming 2
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF performed at an authorized dealer.
position. General Information
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is subject to the following conditions:
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. • This device may not cause harmful interference.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a • This device must accept any interference that may be
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob received, including interference that may cause unde-
is one that has never been programmed. sired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
further information).
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro- • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the
will flash. key is physically removed from the ignition.
Rearming Of The System 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to vehicle:
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn • Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off with the driver and/or passenger door open.
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself. • Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further infor- position.
mation). • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ,
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button 2
(RKE) transmitter. (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
3. If any doors are open, close them. Go™ , insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
To Disarm The System turn the key to the ON position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of NOTE:
the following methods:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Entry (RKE) transmitter. Security Alarm.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ⬙ in ⬙Things power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information). The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- Security System Manual Override
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether doors using the manual door lock plunger.
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will doors or open any door.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
Tamper Alert ther information.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
NOTE: NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position). 2
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors Flash Lights With Lock
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The the current setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
illuminated entry system will also turn on. “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” under “Things To Know Before Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
Press The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect威 . To change the current
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” under “Things To Know Before
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. Using The Panic Alarm 2
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors turn on.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
Instrument Panel” for further information. second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
NOTE: NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
and horn will remain on.
housing or the printed circuit board.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
by the system.
other hand.
Programming Additional Transmitters
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
performed at an authorized dealer. of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
Transmitter Battery Replacement the seal during removal.
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032

battery.
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 2
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Emergency Key Removal
• This device must accept any interference received,
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
including interference that may cause undesired op-
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
eration.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery proved by the party responsible for compliance could
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal NOTE:
distance, check for these two conditions:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station reduce this range.
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
How To Use Remote Start
radios.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the • Doors closed
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle • Hood closed
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). • Trunk closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- 2
• Vehicle theft alarm not active turely:
• Ignition in OFF position • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
WARNING!
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled. The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to the ON/RUN position.
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if Vehicle
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
NOTE:
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. Start request.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Cancel Remote Start
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the occur:
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
2
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. • Any engine warning lights come on
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in • Low Fuel Light turns on
the EVIC until you push the START button.
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
Door Lock Knob

If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• For personal security and safety in the event of a • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N- 2
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. operate power windows, other controls, or move
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with the vehicle.
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Power Door Lock Switch The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect威 Set-
service. tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit further information. 2
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
power door locks if: in accordance with local laws.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
abled. Doors
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to To provide a safer environment for small children riding
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
placed in NEUTRAL. Child-Protection Door Lock system.
3. The driver door is opened. To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function

Child-Protection Door Lock Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
window and open the door with the outside door handle. sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time. 2
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you theft alarm.
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side: NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Enter The Trunk
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a (1.5 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is 2
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door located on the deck lid.
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
CHMSL Button
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock both
doors.
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This 2
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
Do NOT Grab The handle When Locking transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect威, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Power Window Switches

To open the window part way, press the window switch
WARNING!
to the first detent and release it when you want the
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do window to stop.
not let children play with power windows. Do not 2
To stop the window from going all the way down during
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu- AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the windows while operating the power window the window will go up automatically.
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death. To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Down Feature
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
The driver door power window switch and some model the first detent and release it when you want the window
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO- to stop.
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
NOTE: Reset Auto-Up
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger additional two seconds after the window is closed.
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the detent to open the window completely and continue
first detent and hold to close the window manually. to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
Window Lockout Switch
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
window before closing. panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, Wind Buffeting
press and release the window lockout button again Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
(setting it in the UP position). pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the 2
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
Window Lockout Switch
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed
button will operate. from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will
display until the trunk is closed.
The trunk lid can be released from Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
outside the vehicle by pressing the Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
TRUNK button on the Remote trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds. TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Trunk Release Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
Button either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
will reappear once the trunk is closed. in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release Some of the most important safety features in your
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the vehicle are the restraint systems:
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
2
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-
all passengers
dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front
passenger
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
energy during an impact event rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
buckled up in a rear seat.
item in a seat — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized WARNING!
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
infant and child restraint systems. For more information ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
CHildren (LATCH). cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow between you and the door. 2
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
their arm.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”) WARNING!
You should read the instructions provided with your • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
shoulder belts properly. some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be air bags.
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate. (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
could cause serious injury, including death. Air led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
instrument panel. vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain • Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the you to be severely injured or killed.
seat.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
(Continued) on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
WARNING!
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in 2
be belted at all times. these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
Lap/Shoulder Belts or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
lap/shoulder belts. belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the using a seat belt properly.
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will belts are designed to go around the large bones of
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the your body. These are the strongest parts of your
vehicle or being thrown out. body and can take the forces of a collision best.
(Continued)
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might the belt go around your lap.
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat. Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride 2
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter- belt in a collision.
nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Removing Slack From Belt

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
WARNING!
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. 2
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING!
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi- Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
ately and have it fixed. not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- etc.).
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
up or down to the position that fits you best. anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will the latch plate.
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ALR and is being used for normal usage:
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not 2
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
feature for each seating position. out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
Driver Center Passenger latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Second Row ALR ALR ALR Equipped
• N/A — Not Applicable In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
WARNING!
years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in the rear seat. • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. working properly when checked according to the
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until procedures in the Service Manual.
the entire belt is extracted. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Energy Management Feature
now in the Automatic Locking Mode. This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it collision.
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
locking mode. designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
The seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlert姞)
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. front passenger (if equipped with front passenger 2
These devices may improve the performance of the seat BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
pants, including those in child restraints. turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
worn snugly and positioned properly. speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
notification. throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the the best way to keep the baby safe.
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is a collision.
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
Seat Belt Extender
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac- If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
tivating BeltAlert威. when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened. tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can in-
crease the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when 2
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 2 — Knee Bolster
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The vanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. Knee Air Bag
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for air bags are located above the side windows and their
Advanced Air Bags. covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
inflation based on several factors, including the severity protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
and type of collision. SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front NOTE:
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether authorized dealer immediately.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The Air Bag System Components
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
Advanced Front Air Bags.
system components:
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
• Air Bag Warning Light Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Steering Wheel and Column The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
• Instrument Panel
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as 2
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
• Knee Impact Bolster which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
WARNING!
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
• No objects should be placed over or near the air provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
bag on the instrument panel, because any such during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
etc.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air 2
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, NOTE:
covering both windows on the impact side. • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection. • If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
WARNING! will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up of the vehicle for any reason.
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
free from any obstructions. restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
between you and the side air bags; the performance seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil-
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
pushed into you, causing serious injury. windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
child.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag required for this vehicle.
2
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
Knee Impact Bolsters ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SAB, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec-
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
collisions depending on several factors, including the
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
occupant protection.
or rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions, sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle away from an inflating air bag.
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, or in
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
bags will not inflate.
initial deceleration.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
type of collision.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
have deployed.
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units
comes on again after initial startup. The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering 2
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
air bag system immediately. helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air Inflator Units
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
Unit
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering collision.
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
the side of the air bag.
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
(SABIC) Inflator Units vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may Front And Side Impact Sensors 2
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
events.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Enhanced Accident Response System
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 the communication network remains intact, and the
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you event the ORC will determine whether to have the
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag ing functions:
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side • Cut off fuel to the engine.
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is cycled off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
the battery has power or until the ignition key is or all of the following may occur:
removed. • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
• Unlock the doors automatically. abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF. floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
If A Deployment Occurs They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately after deployment.
immediately.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
the air bag system. process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on Maintaining Your Air Bag System
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning. WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- • Modifications to any part of the air bag system 2
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
bags will not be in place to protect you. be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
WARNING! wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may You will want to have the air bags ready to
not function properly if modifications are made. inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
air bag system service. If your seat, including your circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any with air bag system electrical components. While the air
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved the air bag system immediately.
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
modify the air bag system for persons with dis- the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
abilities, contact your authorized dealer. cycled to the ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint were buckled/fastened;
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check 2
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on
the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. These data can help provide a better understanding of
Event Data Recorder (EDR) the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle crash investigation.
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- the rear seats rather than in the front.
ment, can read the information if they have access to the There are different sizes and types of restraints for
vehicle or the EDR. children from newborn size to the child almost large
Child Restraints enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
seat for your child.
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
WARNING!
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
it in the vehicle where you will use it. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to 2
NOTE: For additional information, refer to hold even an infant on your lap could become so
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana- great that you could not hold the child, no matter
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web- how strong you are. The child and others could be
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
and who have not reached the height or Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
weight limits of their child restraint seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-
who have out-grown the height or weight point Harness, facing forward in the rear
limit of their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
for Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of the vehicle
their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air 2
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible years or younger, including a child in a rearward
child seats. facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the seat.
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Older Children And Child Restraints
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
WARNING!
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
All children whose weight or height is above the infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a collision. The child could be badly injured or
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over directions exactly when installing an infant or
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against child restraint.
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
in the vehicle by the seat belt. ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the 2
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone: child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat? or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Restraint Only + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- 2
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating

position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
What is the weight limit (child’s 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child re- until the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH an- child and the child restraint is
chorage system to attach the child 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt 2
restraint? and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and No Do not use the seat belt when you
the seat belt be used together to use the LATCH anchorage system
attach a rear-facing or forward- to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint? facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the N/A
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
Can two child restraints be at- No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage

tached using a common lower with two or more child restraints.
LATCH anchorage? If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes The child seat may touch the back
touch the back of the front passen- of the front passenger seat if the
ger seat? child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be re- Yes, center position only.
moved?
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it 2
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages

behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are under a anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it. rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu- 3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child that seating position. For some second row seats, you
restraint systems will be installed as described here. may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. 2
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
ing position.
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
position has. Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
anchorages. in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt them.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction. WARNING!
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt Improper installation of a child restraint to the
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
used by other occupants or being used to secure child Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
Belt
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will Restraints in this Vehicle
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, 2
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint? child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al-
seat? lowed, if the child restraint manu-
facturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, center position only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Yes In positions with cinching latch
tighten the seat belt against the belt plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
path of the child restraint? may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is 2
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
better fit. bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.” 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
against the child seat.
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing attach a tether anchor.
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt “click.”
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
in any direction.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the the child restraint rearward and downward into the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. vehicle seat.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
a better fit. attach a tether anchor.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
path.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Anchorage
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have 1. Look behind the seating position where you 2
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon- plan to install the child restraint to find the
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short tether anchorage. You may need to move the
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert seat forward to provide better access to the
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 anchorage for that seating position (see the
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child charts above), move the child restraint to
restraint. another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate behind the seat where you are placing the child
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint.
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Adjustable Headrest Downward Position
Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button

5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
2
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

Tether Strap Mounting
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
CAUTION!
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
mental and should be avoided. in the engine or damage may result.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”.
SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
WARNING!
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon 2
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
WARNING! Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may follow these safety tips:
cause serious injury or death. • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, confined areas any longer than needed to move
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people your vehicle in or out of the area.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
injured or killed. open, make sure that all windows are closed and
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
belts.
(Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
blower at high speed. frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The light should come on and remain on for
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
not lit during starting, see your authorized
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
WARNING!
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- 2
Defroster
sonal injury.
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place • Always make sure that floor mats are properly
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to attached to the floor mat fasteners.
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your • Never place or install floor mats or other floor
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
able. secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
Floor Mat Safety Information ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have Tires
been removed for cleaning. Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob- lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
control. (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Lights Fluid Leaks
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or 2
panel. brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 3
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .110 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .114
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender
Features Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED . .115
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming ▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light —
䡵 Uconnect威 (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Uconnect威 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .112
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect威 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Uconnect威 8.4/8.4 Nav. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect威 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 ▫ Uconnect威 Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
䡵 Uconnect威 Phone (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Uconnect威 8.4/8.4 Nav. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 ▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .171 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ▫ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .213 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .214 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 3
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
(Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . .216
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .221
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .238
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .230
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .233
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .234
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .246
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .247 ▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .264
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 ▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped. . . .266
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 䡵 PARKSENSE威 REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ ParkSense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 3
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ ParkSense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ ParkSense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense威 . . . . . . . .273
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .253
▫ Service The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .256
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .258
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense威 System . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .260
▫ ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .274
䡵 PARKVIEW威 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Turning ParkView威 On Or Off —
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
With Touch Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .291
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .292
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .281
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink威. . .283
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .287
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 3
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .307
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Glovebox Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will 3
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
Automatic Dimming Mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
CAUTION! passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
the doors.
forward, full rearward and normal.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto- will move slightly downward from the present position
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirror adjusts. mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-
Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with rors in Reverse position.
approach lighting contain one LED, which is located in
the upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach
light supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
NOTE:
• The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect威 System.
3
• Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi-
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information. Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped Visor
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
visor and pull rearward. motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle. 3
Slide-On-Rod Feature
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
when the vehicle is in PARK. vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
BSM Warning Light
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the Entering From The Side
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
side of the vehicle.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function 3
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three Side Monitoring
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
3
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path

Opposing Traffic
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible 3
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
RCP Detection Zones parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi- vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
parking lot situations. death.
Modes Of Operation turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
Uconnect威 System. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
tected object are present on the same side at the same
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
formation.
addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert be reduced.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond system, the radio volume is reduced.
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the appropriate visual alert only.
the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off Uconnect姞 (4.3)
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no Uconnect姞 4.3
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
systems.
vehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone al-
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile 3
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle phone.
is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled Uconnect威 Phone supports the following features:
and used.
Voice Activated features:
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smiths Mo-
When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
bile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”),
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailable- • Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”),
Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
Back”),
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
Recent Calls”),
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
Smith Mobile”). vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect威 Phone.
Screen Activated Features:
For Uconnect威 customer support, visit the following
• Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen,
website:
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
• www.UconnectPhone.com
played on the touch-screen,
• or call 1–877–855–8400
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen, If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
you may not be able to use any Uconnect威 Phone
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs,
features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth威 Device via the phone manufacturer for details.
touch-screen,
Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
to connect to them quickly. vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and
WARNING!
one audio device can be used with the system at a time.
Any voice commanded system should be used only The system is available in English, Spanish, or French
in safe driving conditions following all applicable languages.
laws, including laws regarding phone use. All atten- Uconnect威 Phone Button
tion should be focused on safely operating the ve- 3
hicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision The Uconnect威 Phone Button is used to get
causing serious injury or death. into the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone-
The Uconnect威 Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威 book etc., When you press the button you will
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect威 features hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other Uconnect威 Voice Command Button
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect威 Phone The Uconnect威 Voice Command Button is
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be only used for “barge in” and when you are
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone already in a call and you want to send Tones or
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s make another call.
Uconnect威 Phone. The Uconnect威 Phone allows up to ten
mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
switch), if so equipped. prompt.
Operation • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
mobile”.
Uconnect威 Phone prompts. There are two general meth-
ods for how Voice Command works: • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile”. given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to it. For example, you can use the compound command
guide you to complete the task. form voice command “Search for John Smith”, or you
You will be prompted for a specific command and then can break the compound command form into two
guided through the available options. voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
“John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect威 Phone
works best when you talk in a normal conversational do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ requested but the specific name was not recognized.
meters away from you.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
Natural Speech requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
Your Uconnect威 Phone Voice system uses a Natural 3
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. the Voice Command button.
Voice Command Tree
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
Help Command
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”. If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase the beep.
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- To activate the Uconnect威 Phone from idle, simply press
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and the button and say a command or say “help”. All
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command NOTE:
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and • You must have Bluetooth威 enabled on your phone to
you will be returned to the main menu. complete this procedure.
You can also press the or buttons when the • The vehicle must be in PARK.
system is listening for a command and be returned to the
1. You can do either of the following:
main or previous menu.
a. Press the “Settings” hard-key, Page down to the
NOTE: Pressing the or buttons while the system
“Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key, press it and you will
is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to “Barge In —
see the “Paired Phones” screen. If there are no
Overriding Prompts” for further information.
paired phones you will see <Empty> as the first
Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone device name.
To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the Phone
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone. soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect威 Phone
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer- main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The are no phones currently paired a pop-up will
Uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instruc- appear. If you select “Yes” you will go the “Paired
tions for pairing. Phones” screen, if you select “No” you will return
to the Uconnect威 Phone main menu.
2. At the “Paired Phones” screen press the “Add Device” • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 en-
soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear. abled Audio Device. When prompted on the device,
select the “Uconnect威” device and enter the PIN,
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 en-
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, • Uconnect威 Phone will display an in process screen
select the “Uconnect威” device and enter the PIN. while the system is connecting,
3
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed, • When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired phones within range. precedence over other paired devices within range.
Pair A Bluetooth威 Streaming Audio Device NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired
• Touch the “Player” hard-key to begin,
will have the higher priority.
• Press the “Source” soft-key,
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
• Change the Source to Bluetooth威, a list of paired audio devices.
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, • “Show Paired Audio Devices”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
Audio Device
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
Uconnect威 Phone will automatically connect to the high-
est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
range. If you would need to choose a particular Phone or • Select the Phone or Audio Device,
Audio Device follow these steps:
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key, Device” soft-key,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key, • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/ Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
Device” soft-key,
• Select the Phone or Audio Device,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete De-
vice” soft-key,
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威
website for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook,
• Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name”
currently connected device, section. 3
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favor- • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
ite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
the top of the list, made to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
Transfer From Mobile Phone
to the Uconnect威 Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- • Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- listing to alter, Emergency for example,
able for use.
• Once Emergency is touched, the Edit soft-key appears.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given the
phone is accessible. choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default,
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be
Phone Call Features
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next The following features can be accessed through the
phone connection. Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
Emergency And Towing Assistance
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not accessed through the Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your
be deleted or the names can not be changed. mobile service provider for the features that you have.
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps. Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
• Touch the “phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
screen, with Uconnect威 Phone.
• Redial, Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Dial by touching in the number, • Press the button to begin,
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back), say “Call John Doe Mobile”,
• Mobile Phonebook, • The Uconnect威 Phone will dial the number associated 3
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
• Recent Call Log.
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
Call Controls
done with 1 call or less active.
The touch-screen allows you to control the following call
Dial By Saying A Number
features:
• Press the button to begin,
• Answer
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• End
say “Dial 248-555-1212”,
• Ignore
• The Uconnect威 Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute Recent Calls
• Transfer the call to/from the phone You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Swap 2 active calls
• Incoming Calls
• Join 2 active calls together
• Outgoing Calls
Touch-Tone Number Entry
• Missed Calls
• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
• All Calls
• Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls
• The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
• Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
You can also press the button and say “Show my
touch “Call”. incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press will be displayed.
the button while in a call and say “1234#” or you
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail pass-
“Recent” or “Missed”.
word is stored in your mobile phonebook.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the
Currently In Progress market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the button on the Progress 3
steering wheel to accept the call.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
Currently In Progress by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
If a call is currently in progress and you have another call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
call waiting that you normally hear when using your the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial
mobile phone. Uconnect威 Phone will then interrupt the a number from the dialpad, recent calls or from the
vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the button Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming to “Join Calls” in this section.
call.
Toggling Between Calls the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the
far end, a call on hold may not become active automati-
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
press the button until you hear a single beep, indicat-
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have Redial
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
• Press the “Redial” soft-key,
Also you can press the Swap soft-key on the Phone main
screen. • or press the button and after the “Listening”
Join Calls prompt and the following beep, say “Redial”,
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main say “Redial”,
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. • The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that
Call Termination was dialed from your mobile phone.
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call Continuation

soft-key or the button. Only the active call(s) will be Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
continue on the Uconnect威 Phone either until the call say “Emergency” and the Uconnect威 Phone will in-
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates struct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
cessation of the call on the Uconnect威 Phone and number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
transfer of the call to the mobile phone. and Mexico.
Uconnect姞 Phone Features NOTE: 3
Emergency Assistance • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
reachable:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency area.
number for your area.
• The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
operational, you may reach the emergency number as for the mobile phone directly.
follows:
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
Uconnect威 Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
network coverage and stays connected to the Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Uconnect威 Phone. Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
Roadside Assistance details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
24–Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
If you need roadside assistance:
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, with Automated Systems”.
say “Roadside Assistance”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
system or an automated service, such as a paging service tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
or automated customer service line. Some services re- entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances, book entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password”, then
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone. if you press the button and say “Send Voicemail
Password”, the Uconnect威 Phone will then send the 3
When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that
corresponding phone number associated with the phone-
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
book entry, as tones over the phone.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
touch-screen or press the button and say the word NOTE:
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “Send 3 7 4
ignored.
6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
automated customer service center menu structure, and network configurations. This is normal.
to leave a number on a pager.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by • Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth威. Response Length,
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
• Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
a numbered sequence.
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
Barge In — Overriding Prompts show your selection.
The button can be used when you wish to skip part Phone And Network Status Indicators
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
Uconnect威 Phone will provide notification to inform you
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers
of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
with the name John. Say the full name” you could press
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect威 Phone. The
the button and say, “John Smith” to select that
status is given for roaming, network signal strength and
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
phone battery strength.
prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Touch the “More” hard-key, then touch the “Settings”
soft-key,
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle
WARNING! audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort that the call did not go through even though the call is in
and convenience of you and your passengers. Some progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
of these should not be used when driving because 3
audio.
they take your eyes from the road or your attention
from driving. Never dial using the mobile phone Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
keypad while driving. When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing
order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone simply touch the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
“Mute” button on the Phone main screen.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice a command.
Advanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞
Phone
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone console (if equipped) and the mirror.
or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Uconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect威 Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • When navigating through an automated system such
during a Voice Command period. as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting, • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• low-to-medium vehicle speed, not in motion is recommended.
3
• low road noise, • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• smooth road surface, in the Uconnect威 Phonebook.
• fully closed windows, • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect威 Phone Lo-
• dry weather condition. cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must • low road noise,
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • smooth road surface,
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • operation from the driver’s seat.
number combinations may not be supported. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
compromised with the convertible top down. not the Uconnect威 Phone.
Far End Audio Performance • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• low-to-medium blower setting,
compromised with the convertible top down.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
Bluetooth威 Communication Link Power-Up
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode. 3
Voice Tree
NOTE: • If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mands will return a response that the contact does not
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
exist in the phonebook.
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
for John Smith. underlined in the gray shaded boxes. 3
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or General Information
“Other”. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Calls” or “Missed Calls”. following conditions:
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect sys- • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
tem is equipped with this feature and the mobile the party responsible for compliance could void the
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth. user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone • This device may not cause harmful interference.
number supported by your Mobile phone. • This device must accept any interference received,
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown including interference that may cause undesired op-
on the screen. eration.
Uconnect姞 Phone (8.4/8.4N) • Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
Uconnect姞 8.4/8.4 Nav
Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
vehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone al- “Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
Recent Calls”).
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone. • Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Uconnect威 Phone supports the following features: Smith Mobile”).
Voice Activated Features: Screen Activated Features
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith’s • Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen.
Mobile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”). • Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming played on the touch-screen.
SMS messages. • Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Smith’s Mobile”). • Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). • Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
• Sending a text message via the touch-screen. vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth威 Device via the
touch-screen.
WARNING!
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly. Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable 3
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging laws, including laws regarding phone use. All atten-
via Bluetooth威 for messaging features to work properly. tion should be focused on safely operating the ve-
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your hicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically causing serious injury or death.
mute your radio when using the Uconnect威 Phone.
The Uconnect威 Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
For Uconnect威 customer support, visit the following “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect威 features
website: Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
• www.UconnectPhone.com
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect威 Phone
• or call 1–877–855–8400 works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
Uconnect威 Phone. The Uconnect威 Phone allows up to ten The button is also used to access the Voice Com-
mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the mands for the Uconnect威 Voice Command features if
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect威 Voice
one audio device can be used with the system at a time. Command section for direction on how to use the
The system is available in English, Spanish, or French button.
languages. The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles
Uconnect威 Phone Button audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or
The Uconnect威 Phone Button is used to get
from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
into the phone mode and make calls, show
equipped.
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone-
book etc., When you press the button you will Operation
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command. Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威
Uconnect威 Voice Command Button Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
The Uconnect威 Voice Command Button is
Uconnect威 Phone prompts. There are two general meth-
only used for “barge in” and when you are
ods for how Voice Command works:
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call. 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to it. For example, you can use the compound command
guide you to complete the task. form voice command “Search for John Smith”, or you
can break the compound command form into two
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
guided through the available options.
“John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect威 Phone
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the works best when you talk in a normal conversational 3
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
prompt. meters away from you.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Natural Speech
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Your Uconnect威 Phone Voice system uses a Natural
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith
mobile”. Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
compound command form of the voice command is
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
would like to”.
say each part of the command when you are asked for
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase To activate the Uconnect威 Phone from idle, simply press
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly the button and say a command or say “help”. All
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and button on the radio control head.
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
Cancel Command
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized. At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
requires more information from the user it will ask a You can also press the or buttons when the
question to which the user can respond without pressing system is listening for a command and be returned to the
the Voice Command button. main or previous menu.
Voice Command Tree NOTE: Pressing the or buttons while the system
is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to “Barge In —
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Overriding Prompts” for further information.
Help Command
Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
the beep.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
NOTE:
3
• You must have Bluetooth威 enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, search
system, a pop-up will appear.
for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect威 screen.
• If No is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key from
the Uconnect威 Phone main screen,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
Uconnect威 screen, this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
• See Step 4 to complete the process. precedence over other paired phones within range.
4. Uconnect威 Phone will display an in progress screen Pair Additional Mobile Phones
while the system is connecting. • Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
screen,
• Next, touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 en-
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect威
screen,
• Uconnect威 Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
• When the pairing process has successfully completed, NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
phone the highest priority. This phone will take pre- priority.
cedence over other paired phones within range. You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio: 3
• “Show Paired Phones” or
• “Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth威 Streaming Audio Device
• Touch the “Player” or “Media” soft-key to begin,
• Change the Source to Bluetooth威,
• Touch the “Bluetooth威” soft-key to display the Paired
Audio Devices screen,
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the You can also use the following VR command to bring up
system, a pop-up will appear. a list of paired audio devices.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 en- • “Show Paired Audio Devices”
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect威
Audio Device
screen,
Uconnect威 Phone will automatically connect to the high-
• Uconnect威 Phone will display an in process screen est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
while the system is connecting, range. If you would need to choose a particular phone or
• When the pairing process has successfully completed, Audio Device follow these steps:
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not • Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
precedence over other paired devices within range. • Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Paired
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
device priority is determined by the order in which it was • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device • The options pop-up will be displayed,
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key, • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
name, 3
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• The options pop-up will be displayed,
• Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key,
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. name,
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device • The options pop-up will be displayed,
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
chosen device move to the top of the list,
• Touch the Phone/Bluetooth威 soft-key,
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the
currently connected device,
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
Transfer From Mobile Phone loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect威 Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威 able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
website for supported phones. able for use.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook, • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name” phone is accessible.
section.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
made to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you ferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next
start the vehicle. phone connection.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the 3
phone main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phone-
book from the Phone main screen, then select the
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From
the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
and then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch
the + on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up
appears, touch “Add from Mobile”. You will then be • Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
asked which contact and number to choose from your then touch the + Options soft-key.
mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite
• Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
will be shown.
remove.
To Remove A Favorite
• The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
• To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the Favs”.
Phone main screen.
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only
be altered. These cannot be deleted and the names cannot
be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these 3
steps.
• Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
• Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Next scroll to the
bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing
Favorites. • The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number
• Touch the + Options soft-key.
to default.
• Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
Phone Call Features
altered.
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth威 on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides three- NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
way calling, this feature can be accessed through the done with 1 call or less active.
Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your mobile service pro-
Dial By Saying A Number
vider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
with Uconnect威 Phone. say “Dial 248-555-1212”,
• Redial • The Uconnect威 Phone will dial the number 248-555-

1212.
• Dial by touching in the number
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
• Favorite Phonebook
say “Call John Doe Mobile”,
• Mobile Phonebook
• The Uconnect威 Phone will dial the number associated
• Recent Call Log with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
• SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls Touch-Tone Number Entry
The touch-screen allows you to control the following call • Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
features:
• Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
• Answer
• The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
• End 3
• Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
• Ignore touch “Call”.
• Hold/unhold To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
the button while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or
• Mute/unmute
you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail
• Transfer the call to/from the phone password is stored in your mobile phonebook.
• Swap 2 active calls
• Join 2 active calls together
Recent Calls • All Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”
following call types: soft-key on the Phone main screen.
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
will be displayed.
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen will
be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
• Incoming Calls
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
• Outgoing Calls Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
• Missed Calls
Press the button to accept the call. To ignore the call, Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
touch the “Ignore” soft-key on the touch-screen. You can Progress
also touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the caller ID To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
box. press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
Currently In Progress call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is 3
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
the Hold soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to
mobile phone. Press the phone button, answer soft-
“Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine two
key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.
answer the incoming call.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Phone main screen.
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Toggling Between Calls Redial
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), • Press the “Redial” soft-key,
touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.
• or press the and after the “Listening” prompt and
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
the following beep, say “Redial”,
You can also press the button to toggle between the
active and held phone call. • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Redial”,
Join Calls
• The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on was dialed from your mobile phone.
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. Call Continuation
Call Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the

Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the but- switched to OFF.
ton or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will be
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the system until the phone becomes out of range for the
far end, a call on hold may not become active automati- Bluetooth威 connection. It is recommended to press the
cally. This is cell phone-dependent. “transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
Uconnect姞 Phone Features NOTE:
Emergency Assistance • The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touch-screen.
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable: • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and 3
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
number for your area.
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is area.
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
• The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your
follows:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
• Press the button to begin. for the mobile phone directly.
say “Call Emergency” or “Dial Emergency” and the
Uconnect威 Phone will instruct the paired mobile
phone to call the emergency number. This feature is
supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
WARNING!
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
Uconnect威 Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
network coverage and stays connected to the Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
Uconnect威 Phone. details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
24–Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
Roadside Assistance
Voice Mail Calling
If you need roadside assistance:
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
• Press the button to begin. with Automated Systems”.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, Working With Automated Systems
say “Roadside Assistance”.
This method is used in instances where one generally has
NOTE: to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
• The roadside assistance call may also be initiated by
touch. You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re- Password”, then if you press the button and say
quire immediate response selection. In some instances, “Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect威 Phone will
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone. then send the corresponding phone number associated
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence NOTE:
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the 3
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
touch-screen or press the button and say the word
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,
ignored.
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “Send 3 7 4 • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of network configurations. This is normal.
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
automated customer service center menu structure, and
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
to leave a number on a pager.
use of this feature.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth威.
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
a numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts • Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
The button can be used when you wish to skip part
show your selection.
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers Phone And Network Status Indicators
with the name John. Say the full name” you could press
Uconnect威 Phone will provide notification to inform you
the button and say, “John Smith” to select that
of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect威 Phone. The
prompt.
status is given for network signal strength and phone
Voice Response Length battery strength.
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Touch the “More” soft-key (where available), then
touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice
Response Length,
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle
WARNING! audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort that the call did not go through even though the call is in
and convenience of you and your passengers. Some progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
of these should not be used when driving because 3
audio.
they take your eyes from the road or your attention
from driving. Never dial using the mobile phone Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
keypad while driving. When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing
order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone simply touch the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
Mute button on the Phone main screen.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile Advanced Phone Connectivity
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice a command. The Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
main screen.
you.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
Uconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone
during a voice command period.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
• Performance is maximized under:
connection between a Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect威 Phone, follow the instructions • low-to-medium blower setting,
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual. • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞
Phone • smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
Voice Command
• dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
console (if equipped) and the mirror. in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such Far End Audio Performance
as voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking
• Audio quality is maximized under:
the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is recommended that you do not store names in your • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
• low road noise, 3
• Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition • smooth road surface,
rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. • fully closed windows,
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • dry weather conditions, and
• Even though international dialing for most number • operation from the driver’s seat.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
number combinations may not be supported. to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be not the Uconnect威 Phone.
compromised with the convertible top down. • Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
SMS
Uconnect威 Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth威 in order
to use this feature. If the Uconnect威 Phone determines
your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth威 the “Messaging” button will be greyed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
NOTE: Uconnect威 Phone SMS is only available when
the vehicle is not in moving.
Read Messages: Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect威 Phone, an announcement will be • Send a Reply
made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• Forward
• Call 3
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect威 Phone. To send
a new message:
• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
• Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message”,
• Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to,
• If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
sent,
• Press “Send” or “Cancel”.
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
• Press the button,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile”,
• After the system prompts you for what message you 3
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List”. There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pressing the button and
saying the message you want to send.
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
List of Preset Messages: 10. I will be <number> minutes late.
1. Yes. 11. See you in <number> minutes.
2. No. 12. Stuck in traffic.
3. Okay. 13. Start without me.
4. I can’t talk right now. 14. Where are you?
5. Call me. 15. Are you there yet?
6. I’ll call you later. 16. I need directions.
7. I’m on my way. 17. I’m lost.
8. Thanks. 18. See you later.
9. I’ll be late.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link Power-Up
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode. 3
Voice Tree
NOTE: • Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you • Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only
which phone number you want to send a message to the first number encountered in a contact name will be
for John Smith. sent. For example if there is a number stored in the 3
Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voicemail
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
password” only the Home number will be sent
“Other”.
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-
Calls” or “Missed Calls”. mands will return a response that the contact does not
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone exist in the phonebook.
number supported by your Mobile phone. • Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
• These commands can be used during a phone call after been pre-loaded in the phonebooks. Commands such as
pushing the Uconnect威 Voice Command button on the “Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
while the VR session is active. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
NOTE: • Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect sys-
tem is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you • You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
which phone number you want to send a message to number supported by your Mobile phone.
for John Smith. 3
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or on the screen.
“Other”.
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-
Calls” or “Missed Calls”. mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect姞 8.4/8.4 Nav
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and The Uconnect威 Voice Command system allows
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite 3
following conditions: radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and
Sirius Travel Link.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
user’s authority to operate the equipment. system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
• This device must accept any interference received, or a raised voice level.
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
WARNING!
will respond with an error and give some direction as
Any voice commanded system should be used only what can be said based on the context you are in. After
in safe driving conditions following all applicable three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
laws. All attention should be focused on safely session with end.
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a Pressing the Uconnect威 Voice Command button
collision causing serious injury or death. while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
When you press the Uconnect威 Voice Command The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal can say a command. This will become helpful once you
to give a command. start to learn the options.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
responses: “Help”.
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.,
These commands are universal and can be used from any Natural Speech
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
the active application. phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
a normal speaking volume. and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
would like to”. 3
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
set to low. or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it. tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
To hear available commands, press the Uconnect威 Voice do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
Command button and say “Help”. You will hear requested but the specific name was not recognized.
available commands for the screen displayed.
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
the Uconnect威 Voice Command button.
Uconnect姞 Voice Commands Changing the Volume
The Uconnect威 Voice Command system understands two 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
types of commands. Universal commands are available at button.
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect威 Voice Com- 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
mand button. volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in Disc
Radio/Player Modes To switch to the disc mode, say “Change source to Disc”.
In this mode, you can say the following commands: This command can be given in any mode or screen:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when • “Track” (#) (to change the track)
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect威 Voice 3
Command button.
Voice Tree
NOTE: 3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite station
named received by the radio.
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM”. 4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold 3
face and shaded grey.
NOTE: 3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod is connected and playing.
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any correspond- 4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
ing names on the current device that is playing. based on the music database provided by Gracenote.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold 3
currently playing. Command is only available when face and shaded grey.
CD is playing.
NOTE: 3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines”. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items 3
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams”.
NOTE: 3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio”, “Navigation”,
“Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or “Settings”.
3
NOTE:
WARNING!
1. You can also say “Find City”, “Find Favorite”, “Find
Play by Category”, “Find Play by Name”, “Find • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Recently Found”, “Where to?” or “Go Home”. outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”, or killed. 3
“Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shopping”, “Bank”, “Enter- • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
tainment”, “Recreation”, “Attractions”, “Commu- vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
nity”, “Auto Services”, “Hospitals”, “Parking”, “Air- belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
port”, “Police Stations”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Dealers”. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold using a seat belt properly.
face and shaded grey. Power Seats — If Equipped
SEATS On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
vehicle. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down, Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
forward or rearward. The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
Power Seat Switches or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
1 — Seat Control cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
2 — Seatback Control the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
the switch when the desired position is reached. belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
3
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. CAUTION!
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious Do not place any article under a power seat or
injury or death. impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted path.
seat belt. Power Lumbar — If Equipped
(Continued) Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the Heated Seats — If Equipped
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to On some models, the front and rear seats may be
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar seatbacks.
support.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect威 System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Power Lumbar Switch
(Continued)
Front Heated Seat Operations — Vehicles
Equipped With Uconnect威 8.4 and 8.4 Nav:
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect威
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting display.
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
3
ture of the seat.
Front Heated Seat Operation — Vehicles Equipped

With Uconnect威 4.3:
Press the CLIMATE hard-key (located next to the
Uconnect威 screen) to enter the climate control screen.
Press the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key (lo-
cated on the Uconnect威 screen) once to select
HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level heating. Press the soft- Controls Soft-Key
key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
once to select HI-level heating. Press the soft- within two to five minutes.
key a second time to select LO-level heating.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
heating elements OFF.
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after approximately 45 minutes.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats • The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passen- of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
gers to operate the seats independently. normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the 3
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
LO and none for OFF.
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Press the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Press the switch a second time to select LO-
level heating. Press the switch a third time to On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
shut the heating elements OFF. ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw air from the seat surface through
NOTE:
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera-
two to five minutes. tures.
The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect威 Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
System. select HI-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a
Front Ventilated Seat Operation — Uconnect威
third time to shut off the seat ventilation.
8.4/8.4 Nav:
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
Uconnect威 display.
Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Controls Soft-Key
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information. 3
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-
ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
desired. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
Manual Recline Lever
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Head Restraints Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR. 3
WARNING! The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- return to their normal position see your authorized
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- dealer immediately.
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
downward on the head restraint. rized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints

The center head restraint has two positions, up or down.
When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint
Push Button should be in the raised position. When there are no
occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head NOTE: The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push Before Starting Your Vehicle” for tether routing.
downward on the head restraint.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an 3
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
Push Button
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Folded Rear Seatback

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
Rear Seatback Loop sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. seatback above the seat strap.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer- 3
erly latched seat could cause serious injury. ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi-
position) should not be used as a play area by tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should NOTE:
be seated and using the proper restraint system. • Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
• Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the
memory function. Use either the memory recall switch
or the RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory
feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door Programming The Memory Feature
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
button, which is used to activate the memory save
existing profile from memory.
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles. To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release the MEMORY
button 1 or 2. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) (if equipped) will display which
Memory Seat Switches memory position has been set.
NOTE: To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a 1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
memory profile. ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go).
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature 3
can be turned on and off using the Uconnect威 System, 2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2.
refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
Instrument Panel” for further information.
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2
Transmitter To Memory accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the the EVIC.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. 4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, side
above. mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop mov-
Memory Position Recall
ing. A delay of one second will occur before another recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory can be selected.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if
(Available With Memory Seat Only)
equipped).
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, press
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
vehicle.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1. The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you remove
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, press MEMORY
the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to
button number 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position
2. • When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move about • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or or Easy Entry.
RUN position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy 3
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or Entry and Easy Exit position.
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be turned
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move to a on and off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the “Uconnect威 Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instru-
driver’s seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7
mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
Two latches must be released to open the hood. catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Release Lever

CAUTION! WARNING!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm) vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
approximately and then drop it. This should secure when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the Failure to follow this warning could result in serious 3
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of

the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the turned on or off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights ment Panel” for further information. 3
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position. lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
NOTE: 2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
• The SmartBeam™ system can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
for further information.
To Deactivate
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
operation of low beams).
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly. 2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced, the
SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper Headlight Time Delay
performance. See your local authorized dealer.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
To Activate for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlit area.
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain On unless
when the headlight switch is turned off. the Parking Brake is applied. Upon returning to the
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds PARK position, the DRLs will turn Off. DRLs will turn
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. Off when the ignition is switched OFF. 3
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
ON again, the system will cancel the delay. and off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
further information.
turn off in the normal manner.
Lights-On Reminder
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us-
ing theUconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
information. when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight lights or the low beam headlights and press the
switch. headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
Fog Light Switch
steering column.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective. 3
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever Lane Change Assist

Turn Signals Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
three times then automatically turn off.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
High/Low Beam Switch Front Map/Reading Lights
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever head console.
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off.
Front Map/Reading Lights

Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either Courtesy Lights
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the second time.
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed. 3
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Ambient Light Interior Lights
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area. automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Ambient Light
Dimmer Controls Instrument Panel Dimmer

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left Dome Light Position
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
equipped).
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN Intermittent Wiper System
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
the left side of the steering column. make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
CAUTION! (Continued)
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
Wiper Operation windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
3
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first when the vehicle is restarted.
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
settings for high-speed wiper operation. off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
CAUTION! position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving Windshield Washers

through an automatic car wash. Damage to the To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
is left in any position other than off. washer spray is desired.
(Continued)
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper Mist Feature
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate forRotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
the intermittent interval previously selected. mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is continue to operate until you release the multifunction
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles lever.
and then turn off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
WARNING! windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield spray the windshield with washer fluid.
could lead to a collision. You might not see other Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of Automatic Headlights Only)
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
windshield washer use. approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be NOTE:
turned on or off using the Uconnect威 System, refer to
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the 3
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and windshield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
to activate this feature. wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the following conditions:
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
the steering column. outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- 3
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch

— IF EQUIPPED To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping desired.
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
ter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre- wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
in this section. approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
WARNING! or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. warm.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the Uconnect威 System.
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
death. Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
Controls Soft-Key Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
Vehicle” for further information. greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
WARNING! and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin from the driver to provide improved position with the
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, steering wheel.
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise cushion side shield.
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable 3
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad-
justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
the best possible seat/pedal position.
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
ter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed posi- (40 km/h).
tions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator light in 3
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec- You could lose control and have an accident. Always
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
To Set A Desired Speed erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
speed memory.
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will To Resume Speed
operate at the selected speed.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
NOTE: button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pressing the SET button. To Vary The Speed Setting
• The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
compact spare tire (if equipped). is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
To Deactivate
speed will be established.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to moderate hills is normal.
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
will be established. 3
Control.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of WARNING!
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
To Accelerate For Passing system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF preset following distance, while matching the speed of
EQUIPPED the vehicle ahead.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling WARNING!
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. system. It is not a substitute for active driving
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
NOTE: conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, quired while driving to maintain safe control of
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will injury.
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed • The ACC system:
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

– Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming ve- You should switch off the ACC system:
hicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (e.g.,
– Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
in highway construction zones). 3
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
adverse sight distance conditions. when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
– Does not predict the lane curvature or the move- covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
ment of preceding vehicles and will not compen- slopes.
sate for such changes. • When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
– Does not always fully recognize complex driving • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing constant speed.
distance warnings. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
– Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehi- collision and death or serious personal injury.
cle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruis-
ing at a constant preset speed. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
steering wheel) operates the ACC system. 1 — DISTANCE SETTING
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
4 — CANCEL
5 — ON/OFF
6 — MODE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the ve- NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
hicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise conditions:
Control.
• When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the parking brake is set.
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 3
20 mph (32 km/h). • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis- • When pushing the RES + button without a previously
plays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.” set speed in memory.
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive

Cruise Control Off.”
To Activate To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.” the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision. 3
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
ACC Set
speed.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- To Cancel
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the
speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if:
accelerator pedal.
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (25 km/h)
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off,
Driver Override
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
To Resume Speed
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of 3
18 mph (30 km/h).
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cancelled that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
To Turn Off road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in follow these warnings can result in a collision and
memory if: death or serious personal injury.
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
To Vary The Speed Setting Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to in- NOTE:
crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
display.
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph will automatically slow the vehicle.
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). • The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by vehicle to a complete stop.
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to de- • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
EVIC display. may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (me-
dium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC. 3
Distance Set 2 (medium)
Distance Set 3 (long)

same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
Distance Set 1 (short) (24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button itself.
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
• The distance setting is changed.
setting adjusts between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1
(short). • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
3
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance Brake Alert 3
from the vehicle ahead.
Brake Alert 2 Brake Alert 1

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “ACC” • The set speed will continue to display in place of the
or “Cruise” is highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line. while ACC is set.
Press and release the SELECT (right arrow) button to The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
display the following information: activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Off • Set Speed Change
• When ACC is deactivated, the display will read • Distance Setting Change
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Cancel
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• Driver Override
• When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive • System Off
Cruise Control Ready.” • ACC Proximity Warning
ACC SET • ACC Unavailable Warning
• When ACC is set, the set speed will display. • The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Display Warnings And Maintenance NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
Control is still available. For additional information refer
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit section.
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of vehicle behind the lower grille.
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate. To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message tant to note the following maintenance items:
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has the sensor lens.
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur. could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
authorized dealer for service. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction. 3
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
operation.
ACC Unavailable Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
Turns And Bends
Offset Driving
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can appropriate speed while driving in curves.
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
3
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver

alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other station-
ary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be suffi-
cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Information

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and Classification Specifications:
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be 47 C.F.R. Part 15
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. 47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
WARNING!
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruis- In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
ing at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir- warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
ing the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
(32 km/h). vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
To change modes, press the MODE button when the the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position. selected.
While pressing the mode button, a chime alerts the driver
to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to To Set A Desired Speed
normal Cruise Control. “Cruise Ready” will be displayed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position.
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
“Cruise Off” will be displayed if the system was in the
speed.
ACC OFF position. To switch back to Adaptive Cruise
Control mode, press the MODE button a second time. NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
To Vary The Speed Setting To Resume
There are two ways to change the set speed: Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
speed.
desired speed and press the SET - button.
To Turn Off 3
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respec- The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
tively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph memory if:
(8 km/h) increments. • You push and release the ON/OFF button.
To Cancel
• You turn off the ignition.
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
• You switch off ESC.
erasing the memory if:
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
• You press the CANCEL button. Normal Cruise Control).
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
WARNING!
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough every type of potential collision. The driver has the
time to react and avoid the potential collision. responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end Changing FCW Status
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
using the Uconnect威 System, refer to “Uconnect威 Set-
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
be displayed in the Uconnect威 display.
deactivated.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
NOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
10 mph (16 km/h).
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows • The system will retain the last setting selected by the
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the driver after ignition shut down.
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncom-
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system ing traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher 3
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle rate of speed.
in front of you.
• If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will
NOTE: display on the EVIC screen.
• In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the
Uconnect威 display.
FCW Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Service Required”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning

PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense威 System obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
recommendations. direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is ParkSense姞 Warning Display
changed to the ON/RUN position. 3
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect威 Sys-
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever tem. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in “Understanding
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or The ParkSense威 Warning screen is located within the
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
6 mph (9 km/h). fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec-
ParkSense姞 Sensors tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
mation.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist System Off

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the EVIC
Park Assist Ready
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone Fast Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance Greater than 59-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
(in/cm) 59 in (150 cm) (150-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert None Single 1/2- Slow Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
3
Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow
(Continuous) Flashing Flashing Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞 in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect威 System. The available choices are: Off, Sound and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect威 Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for vehicle is in REVERSE at or below 7 mph (11 km/h).
further information. Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威 soft-key is pressed to disable the When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system is mal-
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- functioning, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. (EVIC) will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”,
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or the “SERVICE PARK AS- Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
SIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has age the sensors.
detected a fault condition, the EVIC “PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威 will not NOTE:
operate.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operat-
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer
ing properly.
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc- • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues affect the performance of ParkSense威.
to appear see an authorized dealer.
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the EVIC will display
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer. turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
CAUTION!
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for • ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable to
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care not Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be detected at all. Obstacles located above or below 3
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. the sensors will not be detected when they are in
Failure to do so can result in the system not working close proximity.
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time when
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
fascia/bumper. driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense威.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST” message to be displayed in the EVIC.

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even • Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always strongly recommended that the ball mount and
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve-
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
backing up. You are responsible for safety and vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
must continue to pay attention to your surround- much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone.
death. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
(Continued) shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
EQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever of the vehicle the static grid lines will show separate
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the 3
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau- vehicle.The following table shows the approximate dis-
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of tances for each zone:
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING! CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- drive path.
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
must continue to pay attention while backing up. stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE:If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds

up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With Touch OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Screen Radio The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
1. Turn the Radio on. and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威) and power sunroof switches may
2. Press the “More” soft-key.
also be included, if equipped.
3. Press the “Settings” soft-key. 3
4. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview威
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility. Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights

Courtesy Lights Sunglasses Bin Door

Sunglasses Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart- that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
door to close. battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink威 channels.The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞 NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming. programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis- erase channels when programming additional buttons.
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
3
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to pro- ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
gram while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
view. opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed. 3
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The HomeLink威 indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the activates, programming is complete.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to pro-
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
gram while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
follow these steps:
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining and then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the
steps. frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels. that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button several seconds of transmission.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3
follow these steps: nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to pro- ming is complete and the garage door/device should
gram while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
view. • To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held erase the channels.
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
fully trained.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash
follow these steps:
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
door may open and close while you are programming.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
and observe the indicator light. not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink姞 If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
To operate, press and release the programmed are some of the most common solutions: 3
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- ter.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
also be used at any time. to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Security • Did you unplug the device for programming and

remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
General Information
WARNING!
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
while you are programming the universal trans- two conditions:
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as received including interference that may cause unde-
required by Federal safety standards. This includes sired operation.
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without NOTE:
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
safety information or assistance. pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage device.
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death. • The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particu- 3
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
Power Sunroof Switch • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
the sunroof.
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially Pinch Protect Feature
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
Closing Sunroof — Express struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re- Wind Buffeting
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
disabled. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- 3
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
Sunshade Operation window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
Ignition Off Operation Sunroof Fully Closed
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch sunroof is fully closed.
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
door will cancel this feature. There are three 12 Volt (13 Amps) electrical power outlets
NOTE: on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi- outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR威 knob
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will and element must be used.
cancel this feature.
• The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
Uconnect威 System. Refer to “Uconnect威 Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced. 3
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
The center console outlet is powered directly from the There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into the center console for rear passengers. This power outlet
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the has power available only when the ignition is placed in
engine from starting. the ACC or RUN position.
Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands. 3
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel &
Power Outlet Console Rear
2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw • After the use of high power draw accessories or
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
prevent the engine from starting. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat- sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- power outlet can cause damage.
tently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
3
Front Cupholders
Retractable Cover
Heated and Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool.
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup-
holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise par-
ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the Heat position.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
Rear Seat Cupholders Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide con- passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
venient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintain- Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea-
ing a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows. tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information. 3
Rear Seat Cupholders Light Ring In Rear Cupholder

STORAGE
Glovebox Storage
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment

Console Features
There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift
lever.
Glovebox Storage Compartment Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the center console armrest.
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
3
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
Center Console while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable tion, resulting in death or injury.
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
Door Storage Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40
The door panels contain storage areas. Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Front Door Trim Storage

WARNING! WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your 3
erly latched seat could cause serious injury. vehicle:
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
position) should not be used as a play area by sible.
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
be seated and using the proper restraint system. over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers the vehicle to sway.
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
and use seat belts. collision.
(Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
CAUTION!
Rear Window Defroster
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
The rear window defroster button is located on • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 soaking with warm water.
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
press the button a second time. window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level- raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The 3
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .313 ▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .314 ▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION ▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .336
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect威 SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect威 4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Customer Programmable Features — 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .370
Uconnect威 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
䡵 HARMAN KARDON威 Logic7威 HIGH
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE ▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .379
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — ESC Off Switch 13 — Engine Start/Stop Button

2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect威 System Hard Controls 14 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Hazard Switch 9 — SD Memory Card Slot 15 — Dimmer Controls
4 — Uconnect威 System 10 — Power Outlet 16 — Hood Release
5 — Climate Control Hard Controls 11 — CD/DVD Slot 17 — Headlight Switch
6 — Glove Compartment 12 — Storage Compartment
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
1. Tachometer more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
(RPM x 1000). for a defective outside light bulb.
2. AWD (All Wheel Drive) Indicator — If Equipped 5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
The AWD indicator will illuminate when All Wheel Drive This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
(AWD) is activated. lights are on.
3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped 6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the park This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights or headlights are turned on. lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for-
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
4. Turn Signal Indicators toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal

when the turn signal lever is operated.
7. Odometer Display /Electronic Vehicle Information Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
Center (EVIC) Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
Odometer Display tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
hicle has been driven.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the auto- 4
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
matic transmission.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair NOTE:
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must The highest available transmission gear is displayed in
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to tion Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission”
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
must be reset at zero.
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
tires.) operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
to continue to function properly.
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
CAUTION! does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. 4
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
warning have been established for the tire size illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
placement equipment that is not of the same size, drive normally and will not require towing.
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
10. Speedometer
CAUTION!
Indicates vehicle speed.
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could 11. Fuel Door Reminder
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is vehicle.
required.
12. Fuel Gauge
WARNING! The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal 13. Air Bag Warning Light
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or during starting, stays on, or turns on while
others. driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” 15. Sport Mode — If Equipped
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
is selected. This mode provides performance
14. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light based tuning. For further information, refer to
”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating” .
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition 16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and 4
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system until the vehicle is disarmed.
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
17. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
Light — If Equipped
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock trol (ESC) is off.
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
18. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions,
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on it may
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the the brake fluid level checked.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
sary.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
WARNING!
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 4
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS when the ignition switch is turned to the
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- system. If this light remains on after several ignition
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
inspected by an authorized dealer. problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE: 21. Seat Belt Reminder Light
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/ When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
caused the ESC activation.
22. Temperature Gauge
20. O/D (Overdrive) OFF Indicator Light
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
This light will illuminate when the O/D OFF ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
button has been selected and overdrive has been the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
turned off. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling 4
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho- System Pressure Cap paragraph.
rized dealer for service.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
(EVIC) information by pressing the switches mounted on the
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Radio Info
instrument cluster.
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Info (Stored Warning Messages)
• Turn Menu OFF
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll up-
wheel:
ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info
and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Ve-
hicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info,
Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus.
DOWN Button 4
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menu and Vehicle
Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip
Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and
sub-menus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
SELECT Button 2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a per- 3. The reconfigurable telltales section.
sonal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold
The main display area will normally display the main
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
features. menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
BACK Button messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
into several categories:
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) message takes control of the main display area for five
Displays seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
The EVIC display consists of three sections: the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
1. The top line where compass direction and outside reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
temperature are displayed. as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙ message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙. Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
• Unstored Messages The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples middle, and red telltales on the left.
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
EVIC White Telltale Lights 4
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
tales. These telltales include:
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition • Shift Lever Status
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,6,5,4,3,2,1” are dis-
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake played indicating the shift lever position. Telltales
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙. “6,5,4,3,2,1” indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
• Five Second Unstored Messages feature has been engaged and the gear selected is dis-
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes- played. For further information on ERS, refer to “Starting
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds And Operating”
• Electronic Speed Control ON • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This light will turn on when the electronic This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
speed control is ON. For further information, For further information, refer to “Adaptive
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.” Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Electronic Speed Control SET EVIC Amber Telltales
This light will turn on when the electronic This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
speed control is SET. For further information, tales. These telltales include:
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This telltale informs the driver that the For-
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON ward Collision Warning feature is Off. The
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON. telltale is On when the front radar sensor is
For further information, refer to “Adaptive blocked and requires cleaning, the ACC/FCW
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The sensors require service, or the ACC/FCW system is
Features Of Your Vehicle.” unavailable because of a system error. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Low Fuel Telltale • SERV AWD (Service All Wheel Drive) Indicator
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal This light will turn on when the All Wheel
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until Drive feature requires service. For further in-
fuel is added. formation, refer to “All Wheel Drive” in “Start-
ing And Operating.”
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low. This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These 4
telltales include:
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction • Door Ajar
This light will turn on when a ACC is not This light will turn on to indicate that one or
operating and needs service. For further infor- more doors may be ajar.
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of • Trunk Ajar
Your Vehicle.”
This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk
may be ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
rized dealer.
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for • If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
four minutes when this light turns on. Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
• Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. This light informs you of a problem with the
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
• Charging System Light light will come on when the ignition is first
cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
ing system. The light should come on when the
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, • If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
charging system light remains on, it means that the placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
• If the light remains lit with the engine running, your If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
light is flashing when the engine is running, immedi- hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
ate service is required. You may experience reduced normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
and your vehicle may require towing. Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Engine Temperature Warning Light • Transmission Temperature Warning Light 4
This light warns of an overheated engine condi- This light indicates that the transmission fluid
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- temperature is running hot. This may occur
proaches H, or 260°F, this indicator will illuminate and a with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
pass H, or 260°F, the indicator will continuously flash run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is
allowed to cool.
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
CAUTION!
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
severe transmission damage or transmission failure. your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
WARNING! time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, (after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to the following procedure:
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire. 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
Oil Change Due
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the Trip Computer functions.
OFF/LOCK position. The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you tion:
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy 4
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN
buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func-
tions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Fuel Economy
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Average Fuel Economy / ECO Fuel Saver Mode — Distance To Empty (DTE)
If Equipped Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
history information will be erased, and the averaging will tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
continue from the last fuel average reading before the button.
reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display. This icon the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Miles Per Gallon (MPG) Trip Info
The Miles Per Gallon (MPG) feature displays instanta- Trip A
neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE, this
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
function cannot be reset. Press the BACK button to return
reset.
to the main menu.
Trip B
Vehicle Speed
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last 4
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
reset.
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the Elapsed Time
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure when the ignition is in the ACC position. Elapsed time
between mph or km/h. will increment when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle position.
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC.
To Reset The Display Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
resettable functions, press and hold the SELECT button available information displays, then press SELECT to
for two seconds. The current display will reset along with display any one of the following choices.
other functions. • Coolant Temp
Units Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units” • Oil Temperature
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if Displays the actual oil temperature.
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric • Oil Pressure
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then Displays the actual oil pressure.
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark • Trans Temperature
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected. Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours Turn Menu OFF
Displays the number of hours of engine operation. Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Press-
ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
• Tire Pressure
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING menu back.
THE SPARE TIRE).
Uconnect姞 SETTINGS
Messages # 4
The Uconnect威 system uses a combination of soft and
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons. hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes- that allows you to access and change the customer
sages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button programmable features.
will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Hard-Keys
Menu. Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect威 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter
control knob located on the right side of the Climate
Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the
control knob to scroll through menus and change settings
(i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the control knob one or Press the ⬙Settings⬙ hard-key to access the Settings screen,
more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the
following settings. Touch the desired setting soft key to
Soft-Keys
change the setting using the description shown on the
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect威 touch-screen. following pages for each setting.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect姞
4.3 Settings
In this mode the Uconnect威 system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped such as
Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup
through hard-keys and soft-keys.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
1 — Uconnect威 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
selecting any point on the scale between the + and –
soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Mode
Touch the Mode soft-key to change this display. When in
this display, you may select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status press and release the
Day, Night or Auto soft-key, then by touch the arrow back 4
soft-key.
• Language
Touch the Language soft-key to change this display.
Uconnect威 4.3 Soft-Keys When in this display, you may select one of three
Display languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
• Brightness
the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) soft-
Touch the Brightness soft-key to change this display. key to select the language preferred. Then touch the
When in this display, you may select display brightness arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the will display in the selected language.
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
• Units • Fuel Saver Display
Touch the Units soft-key to change this display. When in Touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key to turn the “ECO”
this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and message (located in the instrument cluster display) on or
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric off. To make your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display
units of measure. Touch US or Metric then touch the soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information back soft-key.
will display in the selected units of measure.
Clock
• Voice Response
• Set Time
Touch the Voice Response soft-key to change the Voice
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Touch the Set Time soft-key to change this display. When
Length, press and release the Brief or Long soft-key. Then in this display, you may select the time display settings.
touch the arrow back soft-key. To make your selection, touch the Set Time soft-key,
adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down
• Touch Screen Beep soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. Then
Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft-key to turn on or shut touch the arrow back soft-key when all selections are
off the sound heard when a touch screen button (softkey) complete.
is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep setting press
and release the ON or OFF soft-key, then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
• Show Time Status status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system
will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
Touch the Show Time Status soft-key to change this
front of you when you are farther away. This gives you
display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off
the most reaction time. To change the setting for more
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show
dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you
Time Status setting, press and release the ON or OFF
of a possible collision when you are much closer to the
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
vehicle in front of you. This allows for a more dynamic
• Sync Time – If Equipped driving experience. To change the FCW status, press and 4
release the OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow
Touch the Sync Time soft-key to change this display.
back soft-key.
When in this display, you may have the radio set the time
automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Con-
release the ON or OFF soft-key. Then touch the arrow trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
back soft-key. Vehicle”.
Safety / Assistance • Park Assist
• Front Collision Warning — If Equipped Touch the Park Assist soft-key to change this display. The
Touch the Front Collision Warning soft-key to change this Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the
display. The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
be can be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and • Blind Spot Alert
Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist status,
Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft-key to change this dis-
press and release the OFF, Sound Only or Sounds and
play. When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert
Display soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The
Refer to “ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist” in “Understand-
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights”
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function
mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Moni-
and operating information.
tor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
Touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft-key to change this
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
display. When this feature is selected, the outside rear-
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to
OFF, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
their previous position when the transmission is shifted
arrow back soft-key.
out of REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt
Mirrors In Reverse soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is the Hill Start Assist soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. touch the arrow back soft-key.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
Lights
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification. • Illuminated Approach
• Rain Sensing Touch the Illuminated Approach soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights will 4
Touch the Rain Sensing soft-key to change this display. activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
When this feature is selected, the system will automati- the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. Then touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch arrow back soft-key.
the arrow back soft-key.
• Headlights With Wipers
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key to change this
Touch the Hill Start Assist soft-key to change this display. display. When this feature is selected, and the headlight
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft- soft-key.
key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back • Steering Directed Lights – If Equipped
soft-key.
Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft-key to change this
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™”
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights turn
Touch the Auto High Beams soft-key to change this relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam make your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights
headlights will deactivate automatically under certain soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High back soft-key.
Beams soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the • Flash Lights With Lock
arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft-key to change
Vehicle” for further information. this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
• Daytime Running Lights – If Available
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature
Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key to change may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make
feature selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
Headlights With Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. ter. To make your selection, touch the Flash Lights With
Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
Doors & Locks
• Auto Unlock On Exit • Sound Horn With Remote Start
Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft-key to change this Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key to
change this display. When this feature is selected, the 4
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s make your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Remote
Start soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto
Unlock On Exit soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then arrow back soft-key.
touch the arrow back soft-key. • Sound Horn With Lock
• Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key to change this
Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the horn will chirp
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
display. When this feature is selected, the front and rear
turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key and select ON
or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Remote Door Unlock Order Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft-key to change
the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only
this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press
On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened,
is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).
UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter • Memory Linked to FOB
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft-key to change this
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the
display. This feature provides automatic driver seat po-
doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and
UNLOCK button. exiting the vehicle, driver 1 and driver 2 last mode,
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter- settings and presets. To make your selection, touch the
N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to Memory Linked to FOB soft-key and select ON or OFF.
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key and select ON or
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
Engine Off Options
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
Touch the Easy Exit Seats soft-key to change this display.
Touch the Passive Entry soft-key to change this display. This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to 4
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the soft-key, and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
Passive Entry soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch back soft-key. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under-
the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further infor-
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. mation.
Heated Seats • Headlight Off Delay
• Auto Heated Seats
Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change this
Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
display. When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Compass Settings
Headlight Off Delay status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 • Variance
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Com-
• Engine Off Power Delay pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft-key to change this and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
display. When this feature is selected, the power window ences, the variance should be set for the zone where the
switches, radio, Uconnect威 phone system (if equipped), vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if the compass will automatically compensate for the dif-
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to ferences, and provide the most accurate compass head-
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening ing.
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds, 45 the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
arrow back soft-key. module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, 4
etc.
Audio
Compass Variance Map
• Equalizer
• Calibration
Touch the Equalizer soft-key to change this display.
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
directly on the desired setting. back soft-key.
• Balance / Fade Phone / Bluetooth
Touch the Balance / Fade soft-key to change this display. • Paired Devices
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance and This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Fade settings. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
• Speed Adjusted Volume to the Uconnect威 Supplement.
Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key to change this SIRIUS Setup
display. This feature increases or decreases volume rela- • Channel Skip
tive to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
Volume, press the OFF, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key. channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
• Surround Sound your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
Touch the Surround Sound soft-key to change this dis- channels you would like to skip. Then touch the arrow
play. This feature provides simulated surround sound back soft-key.
• Subscription Info Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect姞
8.4 Settings
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with Press the More soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
it will be necessary to access the information on the Uconnect威 system allows you to access programmable
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe. features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass 4
scription Information screen. Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on time.
the screen or visit the provider online.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription. desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected.
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the soft-key.
available settings. • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
Display When in this display, you may select the brightness with
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
will be available. setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
• Display Mode between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
• Set Language
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the When in this display, you may select one of three
arrow back soft-key. languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
When in this display, you may select the brightness with language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Units pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
to return to the previous menu.
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a 4
• Voice Response Length designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key • Fuel Saver Display In Cluster
to return to the previous menu. The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
• Touchscreen Beep display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key,
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
soft-key to return to the previous menu. close out of the settings screen.
Clock • Set Time Minutes
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
will be available. Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
• Sync Time With GPS make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When in this display, you may automatically have the to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch close out of the settings screen.
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been • Time Format
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the When in this display, you may select the time format
previous menu. display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a
• Set Time Hours check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
• Show Time In Status Bar driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
vehicle in front of you. This allows for a more dynamic
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
driving experience. To change the FCW status, touch and
Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key
release the OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
back soft-key.
to return to the previous menu. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your 4
Safety / Assistance
Vehicle”.
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol-
• Park Assist
lowing settings will be available.
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status of (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or
when you are farther away. This gives you the most Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist” in (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys- alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
tem function and operating information. mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir- selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE- Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their arrow back soft-key.
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
• Blind Spot Alert in the BSM not operating to specification.
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature • ParkView威 Backup Camera
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
selection, touch the ParkView威 Backup Camera soft-key,
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous 4
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
menu.
to return to the previous menu. Lights
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
will be available.
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture • Headlight Illumination On Approach
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
previous menu. to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ Smart-
Beam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
• Daytime Running Lights – If Available
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey, check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key return to the previous menu.
to return to the previous menu. • Steering Directed Lights – If Equipped
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
Equipped
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights softkey,
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softkey,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that • Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
to return to the previous menu.
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
• Flash Headlights With Lock PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be 4
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head- • Flash Headlight With Lock
lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
whe n the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
menu.
touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until a check-
Doors & Locks mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
the previous menu.
settings will be available.
• Sound Horn With Lock Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check-
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu. NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If
return to the previous menu. driver door first is selected, once the driver door is
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
• Passive Entry NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N- Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start 4
Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
• Personal Settings Linked To FOB — If Equipped soft-key the following settings will be available.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to • Horn With Remote Start
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when • Engine Off Power Delay
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera- When this feature is selected, the power window
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
switches, radio, Uconnect威 phone system (if equipped),
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Options Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available.
• Easy Exit Seat • Headlight Off Delay
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
return to the previous menu. Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
Compass Settings
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available.
• Variance 4
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
Compass Variance Map

• Perform Compass Calibration • Equalizer
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also soft-key.
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
directly on the desired setting.
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally. • Speed Adjusted Volume
Audio This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
will be available.
back soft-key.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
• Music Info Cleanup • Paired Devices
This feature helps organize music files for optimized This feature shows which phones are paired to the
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by to the Uconnect威 Supplement.
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
SiriusXM™ Setup
• Surround Sound
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. settings will be available. 4
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound • Channel Skip
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key. SiriusXM™ can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
Phone/Bluetooth exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow- your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
ing settings will be available. channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
• Subscription Information iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
limited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio plugged into the USB port.
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
services, it will be necessary to access the information on and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
the Subscription Information screen in order to re- not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
subscribe. Apple’s website for software updates.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- For further information, refer to the Uconnect威 User’s
scription Information screen. Manual.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on HARMAN KARDON姞 Logic7姞 HIGH
the screen or visit the provider online. PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
NOTE: SiriusXM™ Travel Link is a separate subscrip- SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
tion.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon威 audio
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver- AUX input; and is activated through the Electronic
ing substantial increases in component and system effi- Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-
ciency levels. Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency
Your Instrument Panel”.
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
supply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture. Selecting “Surround Sound” through the DSS modes
The Harman Kardon威 audio system offers the ability to activates the Harman Kardon威 Logic7威 multichannel
choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source. The surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some audio 4
GreenEdge high-efficiency speaker designs ensure the will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dy-
When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set auto-
namic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maxi-
matically. Fader control is available in surround mode
mum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier
but should be set to the center position for optimal
output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat surround
surround performance.
sound processing.
Logic7威 multichannel surround-sound technology deliv-
ers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
position This surround effect is available for audio from
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
EQUIPPED pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton. precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the 4
wiping from center to edge.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the ing the disc.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no or anti-static sprays.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
player. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- CLIMATE CONTROLS
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known system can be operated through either the Automatic
good disc before considering disc player service. Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Uconnect威 system display.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in When the Uconnect威 system is in different modes (Radio,
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is display.
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does General Overview
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be Hard-Keys
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
not using Uconnect威 (if equipped). Uconnect威 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect威 touch-screen.
Uconnect威 4.3 — Hard-key Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys

(ATC System Shown)
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect威 system screen.
Uconnect威 8.4 Automatic Temperature

Controls — Soft-Keys
Uconnect威 4.3 Manual Temperature

Controls — Soft-keys
Button Descriptions 4. AUTO Operation Button
(Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the ATC to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button 4
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
Press and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
3. Recirculation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON. Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window 7. Rear Climate Button
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
turns off after 10 minutes.
controls (if equipped). The indicator will illuminate when
the rear climate controls are ON. Performing this function
CAUTION! again will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to 8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear Provides the passenger with independent temperature
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on control. Push the button for warmer temperature set-
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth tings.
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after automatically exit Sync.
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive 9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
window cleaners on the interior surface of the Provides the passenger with independent temperature
window. control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
10. SYNC operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)po-
sition. Blower control should be left in the “ON” position
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
vehicle.
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Hard-key
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in The blower speed increases as you turn the control
Sync will automatically exit this feature. clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
4
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air Soft-key
forced through the climate system. There are seven Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
speeds can be selected using either hard-heys or soft-keys area between the icons.
as follows:
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
12. Modes NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are • Floor Mode
as follows: Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
• Panel Mode
window demister outlets.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually • Mix Mode
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. snowy conditions.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to • Defrost Mode
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these Air comes from the windshield and side window
outlets. demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
• Bi-Level Mode temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and dow defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed selected, the blower level may will increase.
through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
13. Climate Control OFF Button 16. Temperature Control
(Manual Temperature Control Only)
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF. Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the tempera-
ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. area indicates cooler temperatures.
4
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically Climate Control Functions
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
A/C (Air Conditioning)
time.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings. cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
time.
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE: Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
is ON.
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
of the windows. adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
MAX A/C
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo- MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of mance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from and the prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when
the front of the radiator and through the condenser. MAX A/C is ON.
MAX A/C In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C opera-
tion to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A/C
indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Control Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or ATC Hard-keys are located in the center of the instru-
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, ment panel.
you may wish to recirculate interior air by Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect威 Touch-screen.
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is Automatic Operation
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the 1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (9) on the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. 4
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation fea-
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
ture may be unavailable (soft-key greyed out) if condi-
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (8, 9,
tions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the
14, 15). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
comfort level.
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempt- 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
ing to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE: The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
comfort as quickly as possible.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect威 System Settings” in
selected in Manual operation.
this section of the manual.
Operating Tips
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will suggested control settings for various weather condi-
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. tions.
Manual Operation Summer Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
trol. to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene Window Fogging
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
Winter Operation windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
is not recommended because it may cause window 4
rainy or humid weather.
fogging.
NOTE:
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air periods, as fogging may occur.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
of compressor damage when the system is started again. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake A/C Air Filter
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the The climate control system filters outside air containing
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, tions.
slush, and snow.
Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .397
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 ▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission – 5
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
䡵 AUTOSTICK威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .395
▫ Operation – Eight-Speed Transmission
(If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Operation – Five-Speed Transmission . . . . . . .415 䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 SPORT MODE (5.7L ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . .417 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .428
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .418 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .428
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .430
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 ▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY (IF EQUIPPED) —
5.7L ENGINE ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 ▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .447
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 5
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .450
䡵 TIRE CHAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .459
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .460
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .451
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .465 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ 3.6L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ 5.7L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .471
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .481
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .483
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 5
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .496
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if in a location accessible to children), and do not
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
belts. Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
WARNING! the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
Automatic Transmission
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a before shifting into any driving gear.
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- This feature allows the driver to oper-
ing precautions are not observed: ate the ignition switch with the push
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL of a button, as long as the Remote
into any forward gear when the engine is above Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ FOBIK is
idle speed. in the passenger compartment.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle Normal Starting 5
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
is firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
the engine starting, press the button again. EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
could roll.
accelerator pedal.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
START/STOP Button
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button. OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
NEUTRAL Position)
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in and START. To change the ignition switch positions
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the follow these steps.
1. Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position: If Engine Fails To Start
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
WARNING!
displays “ACC”), • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
(EVIC displays “RUN”), serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
5
displays “OFF”). could enter the catalytic converter and once the
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- (Continued)
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster 3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type once.
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen- seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
cies” for further information. the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) After Starting
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce- decrease as the engine warms up.
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a CAUTION!
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
grounded, three-wire extension cord. ing precautions are not observed:
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that idle speed.
5
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
Module. TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
WARNING! • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
electrical cord could cause electrocution. shifting out of PARK.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
and turn the engine OFF. When the ignition is in someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the LOCK/OFF position, the shift lever is locked in the engine is idling normally and your foot is
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted firmly pressing the brake pedal.
movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
(Continued)
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
• Children should be warned not to touch the park- This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
ing brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
location accessible to children), and do not leave out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
position. A child could operate power windows, pedal must be pressed.
other controls, or move the vehicle. Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission – If
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Equipped 5
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- efficient eight-speed transmission. The electronic shift
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
shifter. Instead, the shift lever is spring loaded and moves
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing forward and rearward, always returning to the center
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the shift
position after each gear is selected.
lever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF
position. The transmission gear (PRND) is displayed both on the
shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC).
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift Standard Shifter
lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must The standard shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of TRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys- position manually downshifts the transmission to a
tem” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at lower gear based on vehicle speed.
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the
first (or second) detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers). Only shift from DRIVE to
PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is re-
leased and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your
foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever
between these gears. Shift Lever
Optional Shifter With AutoStick威 To shift back into PARK from DRIVE, bring the vehicle to
a complete stop, fully press the brake pedal, press the
The optional shift lever (with AutoStick威 shift paddles
lock button on the shift lever, then push and hold the
mounted on the steering wheel) provides PARK, RE-
shift lever fully forward until “P” is displayed in the
VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions.
EVIC.
Once in the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rear-
ward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE Shifting From REVERSE To NEUTRAL
mode. You do not need to press the shift lever button
Pull the shift lever rearward to the first detent and
when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes.
release. “N” will display in the EVIC.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift
To shift back into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, firmly 5
control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this section). Pressing
press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift
the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT
lever, then push the shift lever forward to the first detent
position will manually select the transmission gear, and
and release. “R” will display in the EVIC.
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as
8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Shifting From NEUTRAL To DRIVE
Shifting From PARK To DRIVE Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the
shift lever, then pull the shift lever rearward and release.
Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the
“D” will display in the EVIC.
shift lever, then pull and hold the shift lever fully
rearward until “D” is displayed in the EVIC.
To shift back into NEUTRAL from DRIVE, firmly press Shifting From DRIVE To SPORT/LOW
the brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift lever, Vehicles Equipped With SPORT Mode
then push the shift lever forward and release. “N” will
display in the EVIC. To shift from DRIVE to SPORT, pull the shift lever
rearward until “S” is displayed in the EVIC.
Shifting From REVERSE To DRIVE
To shift back into DRIVE from SPORT, pull the shift lever
Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the
brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift lever, then
pull the shift lever rearward and release when “D” is Vehicles Equipped With LOW Mode
displayed in the EVIC.
To shift from DRIVE to LOW, pull the shift lever rear-
To shift back into REVERSE from DRIVE, bring the ward until “L” is displayed in the EVIC.
vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the brake pedal,
To shift back into DRIVE from LOW, pull the shift lever
press the lock button on the shift lever, then push the shift
lever forward and release when “R” is displayed in the
EVIC. Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
ignition to the LOCK/OFF position before restarting. placing the shift lever in PARK. As an added precaution,
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
LOCK/OFF position first.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
WARNING!
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
This is especially important when the engine is cold. parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
PARK
ment and possible injury or damage.
5
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
vehicle in this range. PARK before leaving the vehicle.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. (Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If fob and lock your vehicle.
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
someone or something. Only shift into gear when number of reasons. A child or others could be
the engine is idling normally and your foot is seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
firmly pressing the brake pedal. warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure or the shift lever.
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is in a location accessible to children), and do not
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
and turn the engine OFF. When the ignition is in could operate power windows, other controls, or
the OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK, move the vehicle.
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
CAUTION!
will not move out of PARK
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you REVERSE
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi-
tion to the ON/RUN position, and also press the This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
could result. stop.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from NEUTRAL
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged 5
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
DRIVE
WARNING!
This range should be used for most city and highway
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
practices that limit your response to changing traffic automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
or road conditions. You might lose control of the DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
vehicle and have a collision. tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
CAUTION! when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 shift
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational control (if equipped) to select a lower gear. Under these
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift-
for further information. ing and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depend-
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
SPORT – If Equipped
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in- may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
creased to make full use of available engine power. To restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
lever rearward. SPORT mode is only accessible from inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
DRIVE. indicate what actions may be necessary. 5
LOW – If Equipped In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
Use this range for engine braking when descending very can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down- following steps.
shift for increased engine braking. LOW mode is only NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
accessible from DRIVE. indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
Transmission Limp Home Mode gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. Five-Speed Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
3. Turn the engine OFF.
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
5. Restart the engine. press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
operation.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
recur. hundred miles (kilometers).
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
service is required. accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the “AutoStick威” shift control (refer to
“AutoStick威” in this section). Moving the shift lever to
the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or
tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles
(-/+) (if equipped), will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display that gear in the instrument cluster
as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
5
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
LOCK/OFF position first.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
WARNING!
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
This is especially important when the engine is cold. parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
PARK fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
vehicle in this range. PARK before leaving the vehicle.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. (Continued)
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

placing the shift lever in PARK. As an added precaution,

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If fob and lock your vehicle.
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
someone or something. Only shift into gear when number of reasons. A child or others could be
the engine is idling normally and your foot is seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
firmly pressing the brake pedal. warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal 5
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure or the shift lever.
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is in a location accessible to children), and do not
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, A child could operate power windows, other con-
and turn the engine off. When the ignition is in the trols, or move the vehicle.
OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
CAUTION!
will not move out of PARK.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you REVERSE
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi-
tion to the ON/RUN position, and also press the This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
could result. stop.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from NEUTRAL
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
DRIVE
WARNING!
This range should be used for most city and highway
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
practices that limit your response to changing traffic automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
or road conditions. You might lose control of the and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
vehicle and have a collision. gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
CAUTION! When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as 5
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational while towing heavy trailers), use the “AutoStick威” shift
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this section) to select a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
for further information. will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
SPORT - IF EQUIPPED is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will con-
tinue to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
damaging the transmission.
creased to make full use of available engine power. To
toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes, touch the In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
SPORT button (on the Controls screen in the center touch can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
panel). following steps:
Transmission Limp Home Mode 1. Stop the vehicle.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 3. Turn the engine OFF.
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will 5. Restart the engine.
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- AUTOSTICK姞
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission feature
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine
recur. braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer and improve overall vehicle performance.
service is required. This system can also provide you with more control
Overdrive Operation during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa- 5
tions.
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con- Operation – Eight-Speed Transmission
ditions are present: (If Equipped)
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply tap one of
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator. the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick威
mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick威 mode will retain SPORT mode is exited or as described below. The
the current gear. When AutoStick威 is active, the current transmission will not upshift automatically at redline
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the
In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only shift up accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the cur-
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
rent gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
below.
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
• If AutoStick威 is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi- accelerates.
mum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully To disengage AutoStick威 mode, press and hold the (+)
pressed, the transmission will downshift when pos- shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again displayed in
sible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the
of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmis- AutoStick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off
sion to revert to automatic operation. the accelerator pedal.
• If AutoStick威 is engaged while in SPORT mode,
manual gear selection will be maintained until either
will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by
WARNING!
the driver (using the shift lever, or the shift paddles [if
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a equipped]), unless an engine lugging or overspeed con-
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their dition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
personal injury. described below.
• If AutoStick威 is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
Operation – Five-Speed Transmission
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the mum engine speed is reached. On some models, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between transmission will downshift (when possible, based on 5
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply tap vehicle speed and gear) if the accelerator is fully
the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE pressed.
position, or tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
• If AutoStick威 is engaged while in SPORT mode,
paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to enter
manual gear selection will be maintained until either
AutoStick威 mode will downshift the transmission to the
SPORT mode is exited or as described below. The
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick威
transmission will not upshift automatically at redline
mode will retain the current gear. When AutoStick威 is
in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the
active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the
accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
instrument cluster. In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the To disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the
vehicle slows down (to prevent engine lugging) and right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
will display the current gear. until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick威 mode at
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
pedal.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
WARNING!
• You can start out in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at
a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions. slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
personal injury.
of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is
engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
SPORT MODE (5.7L ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED • Automatic (Auto) Mode — This is the default position
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled when vehicle ignition is first turned on. This mode will
dampening system. This system reduces body roll and give a sporty, but comfortable ride. Within this mode,
the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs, includ-
pitch in many driving situations including cornering,
acceleration and braking. There are three modes of op- ing vehicle speed, steering inputs, braking and accel-
eration.
eration:
• Sport Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in SPORT mode (press the CON-
TROLS button and then the SPORT button on the
display screen). This mode will set suspension for 5
maximum performance handling and is intended for
spirited driving.
NOTE: The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride.
• When SPORT mode is enabled, a flag will light up in
the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
SPORT Mode
• AUTO mode will provide a sporty comfortable ride, To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati-
where as SPORT or TRACK will be a firmer, sportier cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
suspension with better handling. environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
• Track Mode — This mode includes SPORT suspension
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
and affects transmission shifting in either “Auto” or
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
“Manual” mode. Refer to “AutoStick” in “Starting
AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera-
And Operating” for further information. In TRACK
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
mode, the transmission has a sportier, more aggressive
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
shift pattern. In Manual mode, the transmission will
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se-
hold gear at redline during manual shifting (console
lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick威 mode
shifter or paddle shifters).
(+/-) or activating the windshield wipers for an extended
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, is displayed
momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand (EVIC) in the gage area of the vehicle display when the
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available transmission is first shifted into gear, and if the drive
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and mode changes during vehicle operation.
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning mes- DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it
Acceleration
means that the AWD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
Instrument Panel” for further information. erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
CAUTION! the rear (driving) wheels.
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
WARNING! 5
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
the transfer case. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
Flowing/Rising Water
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
WARNING!
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy. Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
visible. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
4. Keep tires properly inflated. warning may result in injuries that are serious or
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through • Driving through standing water may cause damage
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
and Warning before doing so. inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
CAUTION! fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
• Always check the depth of the standing water driving through standing water. Do not continue to
before driving through it. Never drive through operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of nated, as this may result in further damage. Such 5
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
• Determine the condition of the road or the path Warranty.
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
the way before driving through the standing water. cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
through standing water. This will minimize wave covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
effects.
(Continued)
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- steering system that will give you good vehicle response
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand- prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the system will provide mechanical steering capability.
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can CAUTION!
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded. Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri-
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas- assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
sengers, and others around you. Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” NOTE:
message and a flashing icon are displayed on
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Under-
and during parking maneuvers.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” mes-
service.
sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY (IF EQUIPPED) — 5
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over temperature con- This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
dition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
Panel” for further information. functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
before attempting to move the vehicle. ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap- fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to 5
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away number of reasons. A child or others could be
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may or the shift lever.
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
(Continued)
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
in a location accessible to children), and do not parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N- is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could authorized dealer immediately.
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
failure and a collision. vehicle stability and brake performance under most
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in wheel lock-up.
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
and cause damage or injury. the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some of the stop.
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
WARNING!
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in- ment that may be susceptible to interference
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose caused by improperly installed or high output
debris, or panic stops. radio transmitting equipment. This interference 5
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
You also may experience the following when the brake bility. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into Anti-Lock: performed by qualified professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
short time after the stop), their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
• Brake pedal pulsations, and slow down or stop.
(Continued)
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
the traction afforded. All four of these systems work together to enhance
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following tions.
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must (HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
the safety of others. This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
accurate signals for the computer. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
WARNING!
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma-
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the neuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situ-
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those re- and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on can help reduce braking distances.
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you 5
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
others. stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
Traction Control System (TCS) is released, the BAS is deactivated.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
WARNING!
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the maintain the desired path.
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re- that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa- does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that the condition of oversteer or understeer.
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
This system enhances directional control and stability of appropriate for the steering wheel position.
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
ESC Operating Modes The “ESC Off” switch is located on the switch bank in the
The ESC system has two available operating modes: center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the
ESC On “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illu-
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- minate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving Indicator Light” will turn off.
conditions. The ESC should only be turned OFF for NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the 5
Partial Off
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by momen-
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This tarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the while the vehicle is in motion.
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
WARNING!
during this short period of time, the system will release
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre- brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci- the intended direction of travel.
dents, including those resulting from excessive speed HSA Activation Criteria
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC activate:
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- • Vehicle must be stopped.
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others. • Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
WARNING!
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK. • If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
WARNING! deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
hill and this could cause a collision with another
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, 5
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
responsible for braking the vehicle.
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
Towing With HSA responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade (Continued)

when pulling a trailer.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
hill and could cause a collision with another ve- driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
hicle or object. Always remember to use the park- a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
ing brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
HSA Off in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec- on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec- windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under- function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON NOTE:
position. It should go out with the engine
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. 5
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
diagnosed and corrected.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- that caused the ESC activation.
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Tire Markings
Synchronizing ESC
If the power supply is interrupted (battery

disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE: tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design 5
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits) 5
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
5
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres- Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
sure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire Placard Location

Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
5
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
Tire and Loading Information Placard inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the weight referenced here.
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE:
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
capacity calculated in Step 4.
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your and number and size of occupants. This table is for
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
manual to determine how this reduces the available the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 5
(392 kg).
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
5
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict-
right or left. able steering response.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
mended cold tire inflation pressure. vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for door.
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at
tion. least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION!
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent the winter.
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition. 5
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures. Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING! authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- All Season Tires – If Equipped
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
75 mph (120 km/h).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
handling of your vehicle. in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold 5
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tire inflation pressures.
your vehicle.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Snow Tires and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
CAUTION!
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern. The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
80D18 103M.
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
on your vehicle at the first opportunity. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time. your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
WARNING! first opportunity. 5
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
only. With these spares, do not drive more than The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
first opportunity. spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
WARNING! ping when you are stuck.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In- Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle Emergencies” for further information.
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep WARNING!
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair) ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
result in loss of vehicle control. 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
5
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Information section of this manual for more information
You could lose control and have a collision resulting relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
in serious injury or death. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline. wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
Replacement Tires
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- failure and loss of vehicle control.
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
sion components. You could lose control and have
ings.
5
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle. TIRE CHAINS
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
capacity, other than what was originally equipped clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load against damage.
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
You could lose control and have a collision.
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
(Continued)
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
CAUTION!
• Due to limited clearance, the Security Chain Company
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equiva-
following precautions:
lent is recommended on P215/65R17, P225/60R18 or
P235/55R18 tires.. • Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
• For an All Wheel Drive vehicle, P235/55R19 tire with important that only traction devices in good condi-
the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
“Class S” specification is recommended. damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
WARNING! the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc- aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tions on the method of installation, operating tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
suggested operating speed of the device manufac- smooth, quiet ride.
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed. 5
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross” TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
reversed. mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to
Tire Rotation properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
and natural pressure loss through the tire. (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the 5
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
sure value.
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and or condition.
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op- • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
eration or sensor damage may result when using while adjusting your tire pressure.
replacement equipment that is not of the same size, • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. stopping ability.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor. correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
the tire. can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
Base System
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each sound.
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
readings to the receiver module. 5
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be
and to maintain the proper pressure.
displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is
The TPMS consists of the following components: low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
• Receiver module,
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
• Four TPM sensors, and each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire
• TPM Telltale Light
pressures, the system will automatically update and the 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn wheel housings.
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Service TPMS Warning Vehicles With Full Size Spare
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
fault can occur due to any of the following:
message will turn ON.
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
(24 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and
the TPM sensors.
⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message as long as no tire pressure is
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
materials that may block radio wave signals. four active road tires.
Vehicles With Compact Spare 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure
the compact spare tire.
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn- driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW
Premium System – If Equipped
TIRE⬙ message will turn ON. 5
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
15 mph (24 km/h), the ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
75 seconds and then remain on solid. readings to the receiver module.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components: Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
• Receiver module,
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
• Four TPM sensors, instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec- tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
• TPM Telltale Light each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be displayed.
used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with
flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the
a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the
original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive following:
this information.
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
Service TPMS Warning next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the materials that may block radio wave signals.
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message 5
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
wheel housings.
(- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres- 15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors OFF, and the pressure value displayed will be updated
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle and stop flashing or return to its original color as long
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed. limit in any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles With Full Size Spare Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
addition, the EVIC will display a low pressure mes- Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound.
sage and a graphic showing the low tire pressure In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
value flashing or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a
message will also be displayed. different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM TPMS to receive this information.
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
General Information
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for following conditions:
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a • This device may not cause harmful interference. 5
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) • This device must accept any interference received,
in place of the pressure value. including interference that may cause undesired op-
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and eration.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the ing licenses:
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in
the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of United States MRXC4W4MA4
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4
FUEL REQUIREMENTS an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.
3.6L Engine – If Equipped
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
This engine is designed to meet all emis- these engines.
sions regulations and provide excellent
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
fuel economy and performance when us-
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
engines.
before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine – If Equipped Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
This engine is designed to meet all emis- wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
sions regulations and provide satisfactory necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
fuel economy and performance when us- and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe- line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
prove air quality. lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso- cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro- nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. 5
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• operate in a lean mode blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• poor engine performance MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold drivability vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer) look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• change the engine oil and oil filter
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the nia reformulated gasoline.
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
conditions and they would result in additional cost. some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
fuel. vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
Fuel System Cautions assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being 5
CAUTION! sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
performance: mance problems resulting from the use of such
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor- manufacturer.
mance and damage the emissions control system.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
(Continued) system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
monoxide poisoning: with all side windows fully open.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as EQUIPPED
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
E-85 General Information
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
running for more than a short period, adjust the hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
the vehicle. leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
(Continued) the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap E-85 Badge

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
CAUTION!
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can 15% unleaded gasoline.
operate on E-85.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
WARNING!
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could refueling
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov- • you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the least 5 miles (8 km)
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
use it near an open flame. starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on NOTE:
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels. non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat- hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom- the above recommendations are followed, especially
mended. when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully Starting
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
Techron may be used. a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles until the engine is fully warmed up.
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu- beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera- 5
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Cruising Range
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
contains additional requirements, developed during ex- consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are 1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure driver’s door map pocket).
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
may affect driveability. 2. Open the fuel filler door.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
5
Fuel Filler Door

3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
CAUTION!
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can. To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
Fuel Funnel could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
Access Cover
3. Pull the release cable. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Release Cable • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
VEHICLE LOADING
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
• Type of Vehicle
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
indicated. The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
GVWR. front and rear GAWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
it is not over the GVWR. 5
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
WARNING! evenly over the front and rear axles.
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
important that you do not exceed the maximum front shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose GVWR.
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Loading TRAILER TOWING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty In this section you will find safety tips and information
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before review this information to tow your load as efficiently
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you and safely as possible.
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
hicles used for trailer towing.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate. Common Towing Definitions
NOTE: The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GAWRs. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
tire pressure. weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
further information. axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
information.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to WARNING!
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a 5
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
supported by the scale. front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
Tongue Weight (TW)
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
allowance for the presence of a driver. than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area Weight-Distributing Hitch
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
maximum width of the front of a trailer. age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
Trailer Sway Control
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
swaying motions while traveling. also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
Weight-Carrying Hitch contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
WARNING! Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch In-
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch dustry Standards
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision. Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Class IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Vehicle dealer for additional information. Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum 5
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
The following chart provides the industry standard for Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can drivetrain.
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Max. GTW (Gross Max. Tongue Weight (See

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
Trailer Weight) Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
information. many trailer collisions.
Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- 5
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: CAUTION!
• The tongue weight of the trailer. • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
put in or on your vehicle. or other parts could be damaged.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers. (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
the heavier loads. control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
WARNING! • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision. cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
as safe as possible: suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
(Continued) vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic ratings are not exceeded:
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
the trailer wheels. Information” placard.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
2. GTW
(Continued) 3. GAWR 5
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements – Tires

– Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper This could cause inadequate braking and possible
tire inflation procedures. personal injury.
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
before trailer usage. required when towing a trailer with electronically
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for informa- brake controller is not required.
tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
inspection procedure. 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor- 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace-
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring

WARNING!
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, 5
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake motoring safety.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
brakes when you need them and could have a pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
collision. ness and connector.
(Continued) NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
Four-Pin Connector 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Towing Tips If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
heavy traffic.
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if • When using the speed control, if you experience speed
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until 5
the AutoStick威 shift control (if equipped) to select a lower you can get back to cruising speed.
gear.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle maximize fuel efficiency.
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- AutoStick威 – If Equipped
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also – When using the AutoStick威 shift control, select the
provide better engine braking. highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or Air Conditioning
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
Turn off temporarily.
– To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces- RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to MOTORHOME, ETC.)
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
conditions allow.
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
Cooling System or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind an-
heating, take the following actions: other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans- CAUTION!
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
Highway Driving ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
Reduce speed.
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .498 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .498 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .499 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .500
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 6
TRANSMISSION (3.6L Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direction.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — slow down.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
other motorists. an impending overheat condition:
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
WARNING!
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
from the engine cooling system. you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
CAUTION! to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops 6
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
WARNING!
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
service. vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body and spare tire.
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center access the jack.
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is 1. Open the trunk.
on a jack. 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
6
Opening The Access Panel Spare Tire Fastener
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire. 4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
Jack Fastener
WARNING!
6. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
from the jack assembly. the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. Jacking And Changing A Tire
3. Set the parking brake.
WARNING!
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
5. Turn OFF the ignition. help prevent personal injury or damage to your
6. Block the front and rear of the vehicle:
wheel diagonally opposite of the • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
jacking position. For example, if edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
changing the right front tire, block vehicle.
the left rear wheel. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to 6
be raised.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
when the vehicle is being jacked. transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
jack. locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If Instructions for this vehicle.
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label

Jacking Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
6
Front Jacking Location
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.

7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Rear Jacking Location Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
and install the spare tire. spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has 6
Mounting Spare Tire been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
NOTE: result in personal injury.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until • Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tight- places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-
ness of each lug nut is 110 ft/lb. (150 N·m). If in doubt paired or replaced immediately.
about the correct tightness, have them checked with
Road Tire Installation
a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station. 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
of the jack faces the back of the vehicle before end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
tightening down the fastener. lug nuts.
WARNING! WARNING!
• A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
vehicle. been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
(Continued)
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
handle counterclockwise. so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until precautions.
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tight-
ness of each lug nut is 110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt CAUTION!
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
station. other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a alternator or electrical system may occur. 6
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump- It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
Remote Battery Posts

1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
WARNING!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by WARNING!
moving fan blades.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
could establish a ground connection and personal
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
injury could result.
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump-Starting Procedure
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
WARNING!
6
sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. plosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
or the discharged vehicle. could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
negative (-) post of the booster battery. the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-
the discharged battery. charged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
vehicle. front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
you should have the battery and charging system in-
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
spected at your authorized dealer.
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
6
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
WARNING!
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor- ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
mation.Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
CAUTION! longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED
damage may result.
TRANSMISSION
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans- following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
mission shifting occurring). 1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray (located 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
next to the shifter on the center console).
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
8. Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(in the left side of the storage bin), and push and hold MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
the override release lever in. TRANSMISSION (3.6L Engine)
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will 6
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
Shift Lever Override

In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
1. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Park Release lever.
Console Storage Bin

2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.
3. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the spring steel lever locking tab
by pushing it to the right.
6
Locking Tab Tether Strap
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release: 3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever. 4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the RWD MODELS AWD MODELS

Ground
Flat Tow NONE IF Transmission is operable: NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Front • Transmission in NEUTRAL NOT ALLOWED
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
(5-speed trans)
• 30 mi (48 km) max distance
6
(8-speed trans)
Rear OK Trans in NEUTRAL
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
CAUTION!
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- • Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is Damage to the fascia will occur.
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers attach to the front or rear suspension components.
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
vehicles under tow must be observed. towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) • Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
position, not the ACC position. mission may result.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
If the vehicle’s key fob is unavailable or the battery is vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
discharged, see “Manual Park Release” or “Shift Lever occur.
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instruc-
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK Flatbed towing is recommended. DO NOT tow an AWD
for towing. vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
If the transmission is operable, vehicles WITHOUT AWD
CAUTION!
may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions: Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km) Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the
for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the
8-speed transmission. ground with no limitation on speed or distance.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 6
miles (24 km) for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles
(48 km) for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear
wheels OFF the ground (on a flatbed, or with the rear
wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in
NEUTRAL).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .525 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .526 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .527 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
7
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped . . . . . .554 ▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp and Park/Turn Lamp
— Models with High Intensity Discharge
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Headlamps (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . .565
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, and Side Marker
Lamp — Models with Halogen Headlamps . . .572
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 5 — Engine Oil Fill

2 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emissions control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- PROGRAMS
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not 7
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
soon as possible. an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
ready for testing. of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To not proceed to the I/M station.
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
do the following:
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
crank or start the engine. is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
this test over. authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your DEALER SERVICE
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
may then indicate that the system is now ready. operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
running. penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS WARNING!
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled You can be badly injured working on or around a 7
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en- motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
warranty. chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle. vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
maintenance schedule, there are other components which nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
may require servicing or replacement in the future. transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
CAUTION! Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per- fluid for the flushing procedure.
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
Engine Oil Checking Oil Level – 5.7L Engine
Checking Oil Level – 3.6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
fully warmed engine is shut off.
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
on these engines.
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
7
CAUTION!
CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- This symbol means that the oil has
tion. been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
manufacturer only recommends
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
API Certified engine oils.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
CAUTION!
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Oper-
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
ating” for further information.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
should not be used.
partment” illustration in this section.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
are followed.
7
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
Materials Added To Engine Oil
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
tion.
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
tives. service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Engine Air Cleaner Filter
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the maintenance intervals.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
WARNING!
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
your area. provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
Engine Oil Filter backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
at every engine oil change. near the engine compartment before starting the
Engine Oil Filter Selection vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil serious personal injury.
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE:The battery is stored under an access cover in the Battery Location
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the 7
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump-
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid battery that the positive cable is attached to the
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean positive post and the negative cable is attached to
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
diately with large amounts of water. battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep terminal posts and free of corrosion.
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
a booster battery or any other booster source with vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
clamps to touch each other. use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
at the start of each warm season. This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
time. unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
CAUTION! Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi- under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected 7
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
Access Door
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
Filter Access Cover A/C Air Filter

3. Remove the used filter. 5. Close the filter access cover. 7
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals.
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as tions of salt or road film.
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera- Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating from a dry windshield.
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo- Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威 marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
equipped).
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with WARNING!
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and Commercially available windshield washer solvents
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
residual water. must be exercised when filling or working around
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some the washer solution.
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance. Exhaust System
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This system. 7
rating information can be found on most washer fluid If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
containers. or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep over materials that can burn. Such materials might
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and • The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
information.
(Continued)
(Continued)
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of tions, should be obtained immediately.
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, age:
resulting in possible damage to the converter and • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
vehicle. when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is impor- • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
tant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper vehicle. 7
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
against you. idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
WARNING! flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front
of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the igni- Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
tion switch is in the ON position. ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If leaks.
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
do not open the hood until the radiator has had not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
pressure cap when the radiator is hot. engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
Coolant Checks
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
CAUTION!
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper ant is different and should not be mixed with
maintenance intervals. Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
Selection Of Coolant gine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible. 7
(Continued)
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional Please review these recommendations for using Organic
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
may plug the radiator. • We recommend using MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Technology).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
Adding Coolant exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are
anticipated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replace- (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
WARNING!
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
the vehicle is operated. cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
recommended and can result in cooling system damage. engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency. pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
Cooling System Pressure Cap pressure cap while the system is hot or under
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine pressure.
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
recovery tank. gine damage may result. 7
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
Points To Remember
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately. NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
Coolant Level
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
indicated on the bottle.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool- • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
expansion bottle must also be protected against result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
freezing. performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at system components should be inspected periodically.
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your maintenance intervals.
engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow 7
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
WARNING!
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and “FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally cause leaking in the system.
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
braking capacity in an emergency. ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately leak and a checkup may be needed.
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail- Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
ure. fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per- taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
forming underhood services.

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
can severely damage your brake system and/or fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
impair its performance. The proper type of brake air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
reservoir. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
(Continued) spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also 7
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate approved lubricant should be used.
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. CAUTION!
This could result in a collision.
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
moisture. shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
Automatic Transmission filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
Selection Of Lubricant fluid specifications.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Special Additives
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in any special additives in the transmission.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- mission fluid level using special service dipstick.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
adversely affect seals.
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as CAUTION!
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your au-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
thorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission
Vehicle Limited Warranty. 7
damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
Fluid Level Check proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not Fluid And Filter Changes
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission Fluid Changes
is disassembled for any reason. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped maintenance intervals.
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and Rear Axle
front differential. The exterior surface of these compo-
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. tion.
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
Fluid Level Check
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differ-
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
hole.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Fluid The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads The most common causes are:
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are • Stone and gravel impact.
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami- • Insects, tree sap and tar.
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. 7
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
underbody protection.
Washing
CAUTION!
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash, or a mild • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
clear water. scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug decals.
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing a month.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner.
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
CAUTION!
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
packaged and sealed. or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions 7
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as tective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to equivalent is recommended.
match the color of your vehicle.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Interior Care
Equipped Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products. upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
Glass Surfaces
WARNING!
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Cleaning Headlights
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to scratch the elements.
stone breakage than glass headlights.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses 7
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive buckles do not work properly.
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
rag.
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
2. Dry with a soft cloth. with the cupholder in the center console.
Seat Belt Maintenance
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
FUSES
CAUTION!
Integrated Power Module
• When installing the integrated power module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
compartment. This module contains fuses and relays. positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the integrated power mod-
ule and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. 7
Integrated Power Module

Cavity Car- Mini- Description Cavity Car- Mini- Description

tridge Fuse tridge Fuse
Fuse Fuse
1 — — Fuse – Spare 9 — 20 Amp All-Wheel Drive
2 40 Amp — Radiator Fan #1 Yellow Module – If
Green Equipped
3 50 Amp — Power Steering #1 10 — 10 Amp Security
Red Red
4 30 Amp — Starter 11 — 20 Amp Horns
Pink Yellow
5 40 Amp — Anti-Lock Brakes 12 — 10 Amp Air Conditioning
Green Red Clutch
6 25 Amp — Anti-Lock Brakes 13 — — Fuse – Spare
Natural 14 — — Fuse – Spare
7 — — Fuse – Spare 15 — 25 Amp Transmission
8 — — Fuse – Spare Natural
16 — — Fuse – Spare

Fuse Fuse
18 50 Amp — Radiator Fan #2 29 — 15 Amp Transmission
Red Blue Shifter
19 50 Amp — Power Steering #2 30 — — Fuse – Spare
Red 31 — 25 Amp Engine Module
20 30 Amp — Wiper Motor Natural
Pink 32 — — Fuse – Spare
21 30 Amp — Headlamp Washers 33 — — Fuse – Spare
Pink 34 — 25 Amp Powertrain #1
22 — — Fuse – Spare Natural
23 — — Fuse – Spare
7
35 — 20 Amp Powertrain #2
24 — — Fuse – Spare Yellow
28 — 25 Amp Fuel Pump 36 — 10 Amp Anti-Lock Brake
Natural Red Module

Fuse Fuse
37 — 10 Amp Engine Controller/ 49 — — Fuse – Spare
Red Rad Fan Relays 50 — — Fuse – Spare
38 — 10 Amp Airbag Module 51 — 20 Amp Vacuum Pump
Red Yellow
39 — 10 Amp Power Steering 52 — — Fuse – Spare
Red Module/AC Clutch 53 — — Fuse – Spare
Relay
48 — 10 Amp AWD Module/
Red Front Axle Discon-
nect
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center

7
Opening The Access Cover

CAUTION! Car-
Cav- Mini-
tridge Description
• When installing the power distribution center ity Fuse
Fuse
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly 2 60 Amp — Front PDC Feed #1
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may Yellow
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system 3 — — Fuse – Spare
failure. 4 60 Amp — Front PDC Feed #2
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use Yellow
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The 5 30 Amp — Sunroof
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may Pink
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If 6 40 Amp — Exterior Lighting #1
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates Green
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7 40 Amp — Exterior Lighting #2
Green
8 30 Amp — Interior Lighting/
Pink Washer Pump
Car- Car-
Cav- Mini- Cav- Mini-
tridge Description tridge Description
ity Fuse ity Fuse
Fuse Fuse
9 30 Amp — Power Locks 19 — — Fuse — Spare
Pink 20 — — Fuse — Spare
10 30 Amp — Driver Door 21 — — Fuse — Spare
Pink 22 — — Fuse — Spare
11 30 Amp — Passenger Door 23 — 10 Amp Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Pink Red Port
12 — 20 Amp Cigar Lighters, Instru- 24 — 15 Amp Radio Screen
Yellow ment Panel & Power Blue
Outlet Console Rear
25 — 10 Amp Tire Pressure Monitor 7
15 40 Amp — HVAC Blower Red
Green
26 — — Fuse — Spare
27 — 25 Amp Amplifier
17 — — Fuse — Spare Natural
Car- Car-
ity Fuse ity Fuse
Fuse Fuse
31 — 25 Amp Power Seats 38 — 20 Amp Power Outlet Inside
Natural Yellow Arm Rest
32 — 15 Amp HVAC Module/Cluster 40 — — Fuse — Spare
Blue 41 — — Fuse — Spare
33 — 15 Amp Ignition Switch/ 42 30 Amp — Rear Defrost
Blue Wireless Module Pink
34 — 10 Amp Steering Column 43 — 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats/
Red Module/Clock Natural Steering Wheel
35 — 10 Amp Battery Sensor 44 — 10 Amp Park Assist/Blind
Red Red Spot/Camera
36 — — Fuse — Spare 45 — 15 Amp Cluster/Rearview
37 — 15 Amp Radio Blue Mirror/Compass
Blue 46 — 10 Amp Adaptive Cruise Con-
Red trol
Car- Car-
ity Fuse ity Fuse
Fuse Fuse
47 — 10 Amp Adaptive Front Light- 55 — — Fuse — Spare
Red ing 56 — — Fuse — Spare
48 — 20 Amp Active Suspension 57 — — Fuse — Spare
Yellow 58 — 10 Amp Airbag Module
49 — — Fuse — Spare Red
50 — — Fuse — Spare 59 — — Fuse — Spare
51 — 20 Amp Front Heated Seats 60 — — Fuse — Spare
Yellow 61 — — Fuse — Spare
52 — 10 Amp Heated Cupholders/
Red Rear Heated Seat
62 — — Fuse — Spare 7
Switches 63 — — Fuse — Spare
53 — 10 Amp HVAC Module/In Car 64 — 25 Amp Rear Windows
Red Temperature Sensor Natural
Car- VEHICLE STORAGE

Cav- Mini-
tridge Description If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
ity Fuse
Fuse days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
65 — 10 Amp Airbag Module battery.
Red • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
67 — 15 Amp Run Sense service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
Blue air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
68 — 15 Amp Illumination/Rear Sun- in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
Blue shade ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
69 — — Fuse — Spare possibility of compressor damage when the system is
70 — — Fuse — Spare started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading W5W Low Beam Headlamp H11
Lamps (Standard Halogen)
Rear Compartment 562 Low Beam Headlamp – D3S (Serviced at Autho-
(Trunk) Lamp High Intensity Discharge rized Dealer)
Overhead Console Read- 578 (HID)
ing Lamp High Beam Headlamp 9005
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Front Park/Turn Lamp 3157A
Glove Box Lamp – If 194 Front Fog Lamp – If PSX24W
Equipped Equipped
Door Courtesy 562 Front Side Marker 168
7
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Rear Tail Lamp LED (Serviced at Autho-
Optional Door Map LED (Serviced at Autho- rized Dealer)
Pocket/Cup Holder rized Dealer) Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Autho-
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for rized Dealer)
replacement instructions. Rear Side Marker 168
Bulb Number 2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp
Backup Lamp 3157
assembly.
Center High-Mount Stop LED (Serviced at Autho-
Lamp (CHMSL) rized Dealer) CAUTION!
License 168
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
BULB REPLACEMENT contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, and Side Marker
Lamp — Models with Halogen Headlamps 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
1. Open the hood. install the replacement bulb.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
Front Low Beam Headlamp and Park/Turn Lamp
WARNING!
— Models with High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID) A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
HID Headlamps
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the dealer for service.
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
an authorized dealer for service. the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
7
Backup Lamps 5. Reinstall new bulb.
1. Open trunk. 6. Install cover and fastener.
2. Remove fastener from cover. License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
3. Remove cover.
4. Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
1 — License Lamp Bulb

2 — Socket 7
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 19 Gallons 72 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6 Liter Engine – We recommend you use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Cool- 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
ant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recommend 14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
you use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent.
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recommend you 15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil
fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil
fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. 7
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs.
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed We recommend you use Shell L12108 Transmission Fluid.
Transmission
Automatic Transmission – 5-Speed We recommend you use MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR威 Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting
MS-11655, such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
Front Axle We recommend you use API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
Rear Axle We recommend you use API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR威 Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner
44–40.
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I
N
T
E
CONTENTS N
A
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 N
C
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 580 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
N equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
T Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
E indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
N indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
A
N scheduled maintenance. On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
C in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
E Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
S vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
C
H such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
E cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
D influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
U
L quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
E tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
S early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
8 vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
miles (805 km). eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 581 M
A
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil I
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, Change Indicator System: N
whichever comes first. T
• Change oil and filter E
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: N
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu- A
• Check engine oil level lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator N
system turns on. C
• Check windshield washer fluid level E
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual required S
C
wear or damage • Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped H
with dipstick E
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake D
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses U
needed and park brake L
E
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and S
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
hoses 8
Required Maintenance Intervals. • Inspect exhaust system
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
page for the required maintenance intervals. off-road conditions
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
T
E comes first)
N
A
N Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
C Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
E
S
C Additional Inspections
H Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
E
D Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot
X X X X X X X
U seals, and replace if necessary.
L Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front
E X X X X
axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
S
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
8 function.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive
X X X
Only).
A
I
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
comes first) N
T
E
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
A
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
N
C
E
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the S
transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for C
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off- X X H
road, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel E
Drive Only). D
Additional Maintenance U
L
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X E
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X S
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine).** X 8
Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine).** X X X X X
A
I
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
N comes first)
T
E
N Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
N
C
E
S Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10
C years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) X X
H whichever comes first.
E Change automatic transmission fluid and
D filter if using your vehicle for any of the fol-
U X
lowing: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or fre-
L
E quent trailer towing (five-speed only).
S Change automatic transmission fluid and
X
8 filter (five-speed only).
Change transfer case fluid if using your ve-
hicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
X X
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing (All
Wheel Drive Only).
A
I
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
comes first) N
T
E
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
A
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
N
C
E
Change the rear axle fluid and on models S
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) C
change the front axle fluid if using your ve- X X X H
hicle for any of the following: police, taxi, E
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. D
Inspect and replace PCV valve if neces- U
X L
sary. E
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, S
yearly intervals do not apply. 8
A
I WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
N motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
A have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
C you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
S
C • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
H hicle could result in a component malfunction and
E effect vehicle handling and performance. This
D
U could cause an accident.
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .589 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 䡵 MOPAR威 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .590 ▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .590
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 9
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .594
588 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 589
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality 9
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico contact: Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
Mexico, D. F. a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Impaired (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 9
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
WARNING!
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, known to the State of California to cause cancer and
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
contract documents, and contact the person listed in products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
those documents. cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
We appreciate that you have made a major investment and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and WARRANTY INFORMATION
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
concerns.
MOPAR姞 PARTS campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
operating at its best. Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer. should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and 9
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac- make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Call toll free at: Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
Or example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
• www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety 9
requirements in addition to these grades.
Traction Grades controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
mance.
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on WARNING!
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
peak traction characteristics.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
Temperature Grades ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
INDEX
10
598 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .244 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .534 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .18
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
INDEX 599
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .379 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .405 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
10
600 INDEX
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Cleaning
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Caps, Filler Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Connector
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . .366
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .317 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .547
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
INDEX 601
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
. . . . .576
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
. . . . .544
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
. . . . .547
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
. . . . .545
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
. . . . .548
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
. . . . .548
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dipsticks
. . . . .547
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
. . . . .547
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
. . . . .545
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal
. . . . .555
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
. . . . .244
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
. . . . .299
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
. . . . .589
Driving
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .334
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
10
602 INDEX
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .527
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .240 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .277 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Emergency, In Case of Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
INDEX 603
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Filters
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Flashers
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
10
604 INDEX
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .577 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
INDEX 605
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Gauges Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .226
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Hazard Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .226
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
10
606 INDEX
Hitches Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Ignition Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 Kicker Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
INDEX 607
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .317
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . .435 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . .230
10
608 INDEX
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .317 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .317
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . .314 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
INDEX 609
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Mode Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Navigation System (Uconnect威 gps) . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
10
610 INDEX
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Power
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . .294
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . .235
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Pretensioners
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Programming Transmitters
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .443
INDEX 611
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Remote Control
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .547 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .368
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
10
612 INDEX
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . .53 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
INDEX 613
Service Engine Soon Light Specifications
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Steering
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Sound System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
10
614 INDEX
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .368 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .442
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .59 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .379 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . .460
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
INDEX 615
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Transmission
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .21
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
10
616 INDEX
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .314
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .366 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
INDEX 617
Water Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly to
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
Challenger
Chrysler Group LLC
13D481-126-AC 3rd Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2013 Charger

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Charger

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Charger

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 charger

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032

Door Lock Knob

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

Power Window Switches

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

Removing Slack From Belt

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating

Can two child restraints be at- No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages

Adjustable Headrest Downward Position

Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

Rear Cross Path

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call Continuation

Voice Activated Features: Screen Activated Features

• Redial • The Uconnect威 Phone will dial the number 248-555-

Call Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the

Front Heated Seat Operation — Vehicles Equipped

Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys

Rear Head Restraints

Folded Rear Seatback

Hood Safety Catch

Hood Release Lever

The headlight switch is located on the left side of

Multifunction Lever Lane Change Assist

Front Map/Reading Lights

Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Dimmer Controls Instrument Panel Dimmer

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving Windshield Washers

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch

Controls Soft-Key Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF

To Set A Desired ACC Speed

Distance Set 2 (medium)

Distance Set 3 (long)

Brake Alert 2 Brake Alert 1

ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver

Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Information

ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning

Park Assist System Off

Slow Tone Fast Tone

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

NOTE:If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds